Panasonic VDR-M50GC-S User Guide Manual

Transcription

Panasonic VDR-M50GC-S User Guide Manual
ORDER NO. VM0405024C8
DVD Video Camera/Recorder
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M70EB
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M50EB
VDR-M50GC
(M70) or “TYPE M70” and (M50) or “TYPE M50” in this
manual stands for the model shown below.
(M70) or “TYPE M70”: VDR-M70EG, EB, GC
(M50) or “TYPE M50”: VDR-M50EG, EB, GC
© 2004 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All
rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and
distribution is a violation of law.
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
CONTENTS
Page
1 SAFTY PRECAUTION FOR REPAIR
Page
3
1.1. INTRODUCTION
3
1.2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3
4.6. CHECKING VERSIONS OF FIRMWARE AND UPDATING
47
4.7. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1.3. PREVENTION OF ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD) TO ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES)
DEVICES
VDR-M70/M50
4
58
6
5.1. ITEM TO BE CHECKED
63
7
5.2. ORDER OF DISASSEMBLY
63
7
5.3. DISASSEMBLY
65
1.5. CAUTION FOR AC CORD (EB ONLY)
2.2. SPECIFICATIONS
57
63
5
2.1. OVERVIEW
4.9. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
5 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
1.4. CAUTION FOR REPLACING THE LITHIUM BATTERY
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
50
4.8. PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING DISC FROM FAULTY
6 ADJUSTMENT
8
80
2.3. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM PREVIOUS MODELS
11
6.1. CREATING REFERENCE DATA
80
2.4. COMPATIBILITY OF RECORDED DISCS
13
6.2. SETUPS FOR ADJUSTMENT
90
2.5. NAME OF PARTS
14
6.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
97
2.6. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS FOR DVD
VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDERS
3 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
6.4. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
101
18
7 SCHEMATIC, CIRCUIT BOARD AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS
125
20
8 EXPLODED VIEWS
155
20
8.1. MAIN SECTION
155
21
8.2. LCD BLOCK SECTION
157
21
8.3. CAMERA LENS SECTION
158
8.4. EVF BLOCK SECTION
159
FUNCTIONS
22
8.5. PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES SECTION
160
4.3. PROBLEM GUIDE
25
4.4. MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
32
3.1. DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE
4 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1. PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
4.2. SYSTEM RESETTING/RESETTING CAMERA
9 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
4.5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
9.1. MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
161
9.2. ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
163
10 FACTORY SETTING
42
161
169
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1 SAFTY PRECAUTION FOR REPAIR
1.1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1.1.
INTRODUCTION
This service manual contains technical information which will allow service personnel´s to understand and service this
model.Please place orders using the parts list and not the drawing reference numbers.
If the circuit is changed or modified, this information will be followed by supplement service manual to be filed with original service
manual.
1.1.2.
ABOUT LEAD FREE SOLDER (PbF)
Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a PdF stamp on the PCB.
Caution:
· Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder, Typically the melting point is 50-70°F (30-40°C) higher.
Please use a high temperature soldering iron. In case of soldering iron with temperature control, please set it to 700±20°F
(370±10°C).
· Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100°F/ 600°C).
When soldering or unsoldering, please completely remove all of the solder on the pins or solder area, and be sure to heat the
soldering points with the Pb free solder until it melts enough.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
return path to thechassis, the reading should be between
1MΩ and 5.2MΩ. When the exposed metal does not have
a return path to the chassis, the reading must be infinity.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
1. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
There are special components used in this equipment
which are important for safety. These parts are marked by
in the Schematic Diagrams, Circuit Board Layout,
Exploded Views and Replacement Parts List.It is essential
that these critical parts should be replaced with
manufacturer’s specified parts to prevent X-RADIATION,
shock fire, or other hazards. Do not modify the original
design without permission of manufacturer.
1.2.3.
1. Plug the AC cord directly into the AC outlet. Do not use an
isolation transformer for this check.
2. Connect a 1.5 kΩ, 10 W resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 µF
capacitor, between each exposed metallic part on the set
and a good earth ground, as shown in Figure. 1
2. An Isolation Transformer should always be used during the
servicing of AC Adaptor whose chassis is not isolated from
the AC power line. Use a transformer of adequate power
rating as this protects the technician from accidents
resulting in personalinjury from electrical shocks. It will also
protect AC Adaptor from being damaged by accidental
shorting that may occur during servicing.
3. Use an AC voltmeter, with 1 kΩ/V or more sensitivity, to
measure the potential across the resistor.
4. Check each exposed metallic part, and measure the
voltage at each point.
5. Reverse the AC plug in the AC outlet and repeat each of the
above measurements.
3. When servicing, observe the original lead dress. It a short
circuit is found, replace all parts which have been
overheated or damaged by the short circuit.
6. The potential at any point should not exceed 0.75 V RMS.
A leakage current tester (Simpson Model 229 or equivalent)
may be used to make the hot checks, leakage current must
not exceed 1/2 mA. In case a measurement is outside of
the limits specified, there is a possibility of a shock hazard,
andthe equipment should be repaired and rechecked
before it is returned to the customer.
4. After servicing, see to it that all the protective devices such
as insulation barriers, insulation papers shields are properly
installed.
5. After servicing, make the following leakage current checks
to prevent the customer from being exposed to shock
hazards.
1.2.2.
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK
(See Figure. 1 )
LEAKAGE CURRENT COLD
CHECK
1. Unplug the AC cord and connect a jumper between the two
prongs on the plug.
2. Measure the resistance value, with an ohmmeter, between
the jumpered AC plug and each exposed metallic cabinet
part on the equipment such as screwheads, connectors,
control shafts, etc. When the exposed metallic part has a
Figure. 1
3
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1.3.
PREVENTION OF ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) TO
ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES
Some semiconductor (solid state) devices can be damaged easily by static electricity. Such components commonly are called
Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices. Examples of typical ES devices are integrated circuits and some field-effect transistorsand
semiconductor “chip” components. The following techniques should be used to help reduce the incidence of component damage
caused by electro static discharge (ESD).
1. Immediately before handling any semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any ESD on your
body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, obtain and wear a commercially available discharging ESD wrist strap,
whichshould be removed for potential shock reasons prior to applying power to the unit under test.
2. After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ES devices, place the assembly on a conductive surface such as
aluminum foil, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup or exposure of the assembly.
3. Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron to solder or unsolder ES devices.
4. Use only an antistatic solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “antistatic (ESD protected)” can
generate electrical charge sufficient to damage ES devices.
5. Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ES devices.
6. Do not remove a replacement ES device from its protective package until immediately before you are ready to install it. (Most
replacement ES devices are packaged with leads electrically shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil or
comparableconductive material).
7. Immediately before removing the protective material from the leads of a replacement ES device, touch the protective material
to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.
CAUTION:
Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
8. Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ES devices. (Otherwise harmless motion such as the
brushing together of your clothes fabric or the lifting of your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity
(ESD)sufficient to damage an ES device).
4
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1.4.
CAUTION FOR REPLACING THE LITHIUM BATTERY
CAUTION:
1. Be sure to discharge the capacitor on FRONT C.B.A. before disassembling the Front C.B.A.
2. Be careful of the high voltage circuit on Front C.B.A. when servicing.
1.4.1.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
5
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1.5.
CAUTION FOR AC CORD (EB ONLY)
1.5.1.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
INFORMATION FOR YOUR SAFETY
IMPORTANT
Your attention is drawn to the fact that recording of prerecorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast
material may infringe copyright laws.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or shock hazard, do not expose
this equipment to rain or moisture.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured
RED.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of fire or shock hazard and annoying
interference, use the recommended accessories only.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
Under no circumstances should either of these wires be
connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug, marked
with the letter E or the Earth Symbol.
DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER COVER
To prevent electric shock, do not remove the cover. No user
serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel.
1.5.2.
CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD
1.5.2.2.
Before use
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
remove the Connector Cover as follows.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three-pin mains plug
for your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amperes and it is approved
by ASTA or BSI to BS1362
Check for the ASRA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the
fuse.
1.5.2.3.
CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD
1. Remove the Fuse Cover with a screwdriver.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure
that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a
replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local
Panasonic Dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for the socket outlet in
your home then the fuse should be removed and the plug cut
off and disposed of safety.
2. Replace the fuse and attach the Fuse cover.
There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug
is inserted into any 13-ampere socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as
shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
1.5.2.1.
Important
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
Blue
Brown
Neutral
Live
6
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1.
OVERVIEW
The VDR-M70 has a CCD image sensor with a total of 1,020,000 pixels and a high-performance
optical 10-power zoom.
The VDR-M50 has a CCD image sensor with a total of 800,000 pixels and an optical 18-power
zoom.
The VDR-M50 has been made compact than the VDR-M30.
2.1.1.
Servicing method
Refer to the following table and perform the designated, appropriate servicing.
Do not perform any servicing other than that described in this manual.
Parts Name
Disc drive unit
Lens unit
AEL-H/AEL circuit
board(*1)
DRF-H/DRF circuit
board(*1)(*2)
FRT-H/FRT circuit
board(*1)
GYR-H/GYR circuit
board(*1)
LCD circuit board
MAN-H/MAN circuit
board(*1)
MR circuit board(*3)
SAF-H/SAF circuit
board(*1)(*4)
SEN-H circuit board
Servicing method
DISC DRIVE FRT-H/FRT
UNIT
CIRCUIT
BOARD
MR CIRCUIT BOARD
(In the LCD unit)
Unit replacement.
Which incorporates the
DRV-R, MOD and HDM
circuit boards.
Unit replacement.
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
GYR-H/GYR
CIRCUIT
SEN-H BOARD SHE-H/SHE
CIRCUIT
LENS CIRCUIT
BOARD
UNIT BOARD
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
Circuit board assembly
replacement.
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
LCD
CIRCUIT
BOARD
DRF-H/DRF
CIRCUIT
BOARD
MAN-H/MAN
CIRCUIT
BOARD
SAF-H/SAF
CIRCUIT
BOARD
Component replacement.
(*1)(*5)
SHE-H/SHE circuit
board(*1)
SWL2 circuit board
SWL3 circuit board
USB/USB-H circuit
board(*1)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
AEL-H/AEL
CIRCUIT USB-H/USB
BOARD
CIRCUIT
BOARD
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
Component replacement.
SWL2
CIRCUIT
BOARD
Fig. 2-1-1
The board names suffixed with “-H” are for VDR-M70 only.
Film type board that connects MAN-H/MAN circuit board and disc drive unit.
Film type board in LCD unit
Film type board that connects AEL-H/AEL circuit board and SWL2 circuit board.
Applicable only to VDR-M70. Although the SEN-H circuit board and lens unit in VDR-M70 are
assigned as different boards, the circuit board in VDR-M50 that corresponds to SEN-H is assembled
in the lens unit.
7
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.2.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
CCD Image Sensor
Specifications
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
1/4-inch interlaced
1/6-inch interlaced
Total number of
pixels
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
Approx. 1,020,000
Approx. 800,000
Number of
effective pixels:
VDR-M70
Video: Approx. 570,000
Photo: Approx. 960,000
Video: Approx. 410,000
Photo: Approx. 410,000
F1.8 - 2.4, f = 3/16” - 1-1/2” (3.8 - 38 mm)
F1.8 - 3.6, f = 1/16” - 1-1/2” (2.1 - 37.8 mm)
1-7/16” (37 mm) / 0.75mm
Auto/Manual
Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom added (40× for
photo)
Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom added (40× for
photo)
3 lx (When Low Light mode is selected)
0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels)
2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels)
Electronic Type
1/60 - 1/4000 second (video)
Still recording only
Ø 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
(a plug-in power type microphone cannot be used)
Movie (with sound)
Still (with DVD-RAM disc, SD memory card,
MultiMediaCard)
XTRA mode: Approx. 18 min.
FINE mode: Approx. 30 min.
STD mode: Approx. 60 min.
FINE mode: Approx. 30 min.
STD mode: Approx. 60 min.
VDR-M50
Lens
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
Filter diameter / Thread pitch:
Focus
Zoom
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
Required minimum illumination
Viewfinder
LCD monitor
Image Stabilizer
Shutter speed
Self-timer recording
External microphone jack
Recording mode
Maximum
recordable
time
(Per side)
DVD-RAM disc (per side)
DVD-R disc (per side)
8
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Item
Maximum
number of
recordable
stills
Recording
format
Specifications
DVD-RAM disc (per side)
SD memory
Card
(When using
32MB card)
DVD-RAM disc
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
DVD-R disc
Card
Audio playback format
Recording media
Jacks
Battery system
VDR-M70
Power consumption (when
recording with LCD monitor off ) VDR-M50
Dimensions (W × H × D, excluding projections)
Operating temperature (humidity)
Storage temperature
Weight (without battery and
disc)
Total weight when recording
(when using CGA-DU14E battery)
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
999 However, if video and photo are mixed on one disc,
the recordable number will decrease
Approx. 50 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the
recording quality and the type of card
Approx. 220 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the
recording quality and the type of card
Movie: Conforming to DVD video recording
(DVD-VR) format
Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2
Still: Simultaneous recording, conforming to JPEG
format (VDR-M70: 1280 × 960 pixels, VDRM50: 640 × 480 pixels) and DVD video
recording (DVD-VR) format (704 × 480 pixels).
[JPEG of external input: 640 × 480 pixels]
Movie: Conforming to DVD video format
Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2
Still: Conforming to JPEG (VDR-M70: 1280 × 960
pixels, VDR-M50PP: 640 × 480 pixels) format
[External input: 640 × 480 pixels]
MPEG Audio layer 2, Dolby AC3
8 cm DVD-RAM disc (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1)
8 cm DVD-R disc
(conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0)
SD memory card
MultiMediaCard
Video/audio input *1 /output × 1
External microphone input × 1
USB terminal (connected to PC USB port) × 1
Lithium-ion
Approx. 4.4 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode)
Approx. 4.1 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode)
Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm
0-40°C (less than 80%)
0-30°C when connected to PC
-20 - 60°C
Approx. 500 g
Approx. 490 g
Approx. 585 g
Approx. 575 g
9
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Item
Specifications
Provided accessories
AC adapter/charger (VSK0631(EB/EG),VSK0631-A(GC))
Power cable
DC power cord,
Battery (model CGA-DU14E)
AV/S input *1/output cable
Infrared remote control (model VEQ3993)
Lithium battery for remote control (model CR2025)
Lens cap
Lens cap string
Shoulder belt
Software CD-ROM
PC connection cable
8cm DVD-RAM disc (in round DVD holder)
*1: The line input function is provided in the following models:
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50GC
Specifications are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement.
Specifications of VSK0631/0631-A AC Adapter/Charger
Power supply
Input capacity
DC output (max.)
Charge output
Weight
External dimensions
(W x H x D)
Ambient temperature for
operation
Allowable relative
humidity
100 - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
26 VA (at 100 V)
7.9 V, 1.4 A
8.4 V, 0.65A
105 g
61 × 32 × 91 mm
5 - 35°C
40 - 80%
10
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.3.
MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM PREVIOUS MODELS
: Same as on left
Item
CCD
VDR-M70/M50
VDR-M70: 1/3.8-inch interlaced
VDR-M50: 1/6-inch interlaced
Total number VDR-M70:
Approx. 1,020,000 pixels
of pixels
VDR-M50:
Approx. 800,000 pixels
Number of
VDR-M70:
Video: Approx. 570,000 pixels
effective pixels
Photo: Approx. 960,000 pixels
Lens
Zoom
Filter diameter
Required minimum
illumination
Viewfinder
LCD monitor
Power consumption
Weight
Accessory Shoe
PC connection terminal
[USB standard]
VDR-M50:
Video: Approx. 410,000
Photo: Approx. 410,000
VDR-M70:
F1.8 - 2.4
f = 3.8 - 38 mm
VDR-M50:
F1.8 - 2.8
f = 2.1 - 37.8 mm
VDR-M70:
Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom
added (40× for photo)
VDR-M50:
Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom
added (40× for photo)
37 mm
3 lx
(When Low Light mode is selected)
0.33-inch color TFT
(approx. 110,000 pixels)
2.5-inch color TFT
(approx. 120,000 pixels)
VDR-M70: Approx. 4.4 W
VDR-M50: Approx. 4.1 W
VDR-M70: Approx. 500 g
VDR-M50: Approx. 490 g
VDR-M70: Power/Control terminal
provided
VDR-M50: Power/Control terminal
not provided
Type mini-B
[USB 2.0] HS mode
11
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M30
1/4-inch interlaced
F1.8 - 2.5
3.15 - 31.5 mm
Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom
added (40× for photo)
30.5 mm
0.44-inch color TFT
(approx. 110,000 pixels)
Approx. 4.7 W
Approx. 480 g
Type mini-B
[USB 2.0] FS mode
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Item
Dimensions (W × H × D) and
shape
VDR-M70/M50
VDR-M50:
Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm
AC adapter/charger
Battery pack
Infrared remote control
AV input/output jack
Shape of DVD holder
VDR-M30
VDR-M70:
Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm
VSK0631(EG/EB), VSK0631-A(GC)
Provided:
CGS-DU14E
(7.2V/1360mA)
Optional:
CGS-DU14E
(7.2V/1360mA)
VEQ3993
Pin 8 type
Approx. 57 × 89 × 132 mm
Pin 10 type
Round DVD holder
PC editing kit
Disc protect
EIS function
Line input function
Number of pixels for video
(MPEG2)
Number of pixels for JPEG
photo during camera recording
Provided
Software disc-protect
VDR-M70: Video mode only
VDR-M50: Video and photo
mode
Varies depending on the model
(destination) *1
XTRA/FINE:
704 × 480 pixels
STD:
352 × 480 pixels
VDR-M70:
1280 × 960 pixels
VDR-M50:
680 × 480 pixels
12
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Video mode only
Not provided
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Item
Number of pixels for MPEG
photo during camera recording
(When using disc)
Number of pixels for photo
during line-input recording
File size of photo
2.4.
VDR-M70/M50
VDR-M30
704 × 480 pixels
JPEG: 640 × 480 pixels
MPEG: 704 × 480 pixels
VDR-M70:
FINE:
Approx. 512KB
NORM: Approx. 384KB
ECO:
Approx. 256KB
VDR-M50:
FINE:
Approx. 128KB
NORM: Approx. 64KB
ECO:
Approx. 32KB
COMPATIBILITY OF RECORDED DISCS
Discs recorded or edited on VDR-M70/M50 can also be recorded, edited and played back on
other DVD video camera/recorders, except for those for which disc-protect(*1) has been set.
Discs recorded or edited on other DVD video camera/recorders can also be recorded, edited and
played back on VDR-M70/M50.
*1: The VDR-M30 can release the disc-protect that has been set on VDR-M70/M50.
Therefore, if the disc-protect set on VDR-M70/M50 is released, the discs can be recorded, edited
and played back on VDR-M30.
13
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.5.
NAME OF PARTS
14
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
15
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
16
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
17
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.6.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS FOR DVD VIDEO
CAMERA/RECORDERS
Index Abbreviation/Term
A
C
AC3
CPRM
D
DCF
Dolby AC3
DPOF
DVD
DVD Forum
DVD-Audio
DVD-R
DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM
DVD-RW
DVD-Video
E
DVD Video
Format
DVD Video
Recording Format
Exif
F
I
FireWire
IEEE1394
Interlaced CCD
J
i-LINK
JEIDA
JEITA
JPEG
L
LCD
LPCM
M
MMC
MMCA
Explanation
See Dolby AC3.
Content Protection for Recordable Media: Copyright protection function that is
suitable for online distribution of music.
Design rule for Camera File system standard: This camera file system standard,
established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA).
Audio coding format developed by Dolby Laboratories in U.S, also simply referred
as AC3 format: Supports 5-channel full-range sound and one channel for sub-woofer
sound playback.
Digital Print Order Format: DPOF allows user to record print information along
with photos on storage media to facilitate printing of photos.
Digital Versatile Disc. A huge amount of digital data for video (movie) and audio
can be recorded on this disc, whose size is the same as CD.
International organization that formulates the technical standards of DVD
One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality audio can be recorded
One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing once is possible (recordable type)
One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 100,000 times is possible
One type of DVD standard disc, to which data for computer can be recorded
One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 1000 times is possible
One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality video and audio can be
recorded
Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-Video, DVD-R and DVDRW
Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-RAM and DVD-RW: This
allows versatile editing functions, differing from the DVD Video Format.
Exchangeable image file format. File format used for recording photos on digital
cameras, established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA).
See IEEE1394.
Also referred to as FireWire or i-LINK: Standard for serial interface that connects
PC and peripheral devices
This CCD scans one image twice (scans roughly once and interpolates between first
scanning lines the second time) and interlaces the images obtained by scanning
twice to create a one-image signal.
See IEEE1394.
JEIDA stands for Japan Electronic Industry Development Association.
JEITA stands for Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association, which came into existence when JEIDA merged with EIAJ (Electronic
Industries Association of Japan).
JEITA has established Exif and DCF standard.
Joint Photographic Expert Group: International standard format for compressing
still images
Liquid Crystal Display. LCD formats include STN and TFT.
Linear Pulse Code Modulation. Also referred to as linear PCM. LPCM is a format
that digitizes analog audio data during recording and converts it to analog data
during playback.
See MultiMediaCard.
See MultiMediaCard Association.
18
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Index Abbreviation/Term
M
MPEG
MPEG Audio
Layer 2
MultiMediaCard
O
MultiMediaCard
Association
OSTA
S
SCSI
SDA
SD Card
Association
SDMI
SD Memory Card
SecureMMC
Secure
MultiMediaCard
Software discProtect
STN LCD
T
TFT LCD
U
UDF
USB
V
VBR
Explanation
Motion Picture Experts Group: Standard related to compression of digital video and
audio. MPEG2 is a higher standard of MPEG and is applied to video (movie)
requiring higher quality.
One of three audio compression standards (layers 1-3) defined by MPEG
Also referred to as MMC. Compact memory card, 32 mm long × 24 mm wide × 1.4
mm thick
Also referred to as MMCA. This association promotes the widespread use of
multimedia cards.
Optical Storage Technology Association, which is an international industry
organization that promotes recordable optical storage used to store computer data
and images.
Small Computer System Interface: A standard for connecting computer and
peripheral devices. Frequently notated by prefixing or suffixing the number that
indicates the data transfer rate, and First, Ultra, Wide, etc., to SCSI.
See SD Card Association.
Also referred to as SDA. This organization promotes the popularization of SD
memory card.
Secure Digital Music Initiative: This conference was established by hardware
makers, the Recording Industry Association of America (RIAA) and music industry
companies, to protect copyrights of musical compositions.
Formally named Secure Digital Memory Card. This compact memory card, 32 mm
long × 24 mm wide × 2.1 mm thick, is equipped with an advanced copyright
protection function.
See Secure MultiMediaCard.
Also referred to as SecureMMC. This compact memory card has multimedia card
specifications, to which an advanced copyright protection function is added.
Unusable on the DVD video camera/recorder.
This function writes the protect information to DVD-RAM disc to prevent accidental
erasure. Software Disc-Protect is included in DVD-RAM disc specifications defined
by DVD Forum.
Super-Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD is inferior to
TFT LCD in coloring, view angle, etc.
Thin Film Transistor Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD features clear
display, high contrast, wide view angle, etc.
Universal Disc Format, which is a file format of recordable disc defined by OSTA.
The version 2.01 UDF is used on DVD video camera/recorder.
Universal Serial Bus: Standard of serial interface that connects PC and peripheral
devices. Two versions - USB1.1 and USB2.0, with different data transfer rates exist at present.
Stands for Variable Bit Rate: This format of coding audio and video varies the
amount of data depending on the subject image.
19
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
3 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
3.1.
DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE
(1) Differences in structure between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50
There are two major differences in structure between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50:
1) Accessory shoe
The accessory shoe on VDR-M70 has a power/control terminal, but the accessory shoe on
VDR-M50 doesn’t.
2) Lens unit
The lens unit in VDR-M50 includes the cushion, crystal filter, CCD image sensor and SEN
circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in VDR-M70.
CCD
IMAGE
SENSOR
SEN-H
CIRCUIT
BOARD
LENS
UNIT
LENS
UNIT
Circuit board equivalent
to SEN
CUSHION
CRYSTAL
FILTER
VDR-M70 LENS UNIT
VDR-M50 LENS UNIT
Fig. 3-1-2
20
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1.
PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Perform troubleshooting in the order shown in Fig. 4-1-1.
No improvement
Check
phenomenon
System reset
(section 4-2)
No message or
error code
appears*1
Problem guide
(section 4-3)
Updating
unneeded
Check firmware
version
(section 4-6-1)
Trouble
Diagnosis
(section 4-7)
Updating
needed
: Phenomenon
Message
appears*1
Messages and
Troubleshooting
(section 4-4)
Update firmware
(section 4-6-2)
: Troubleshooting
: Check
Error code
appears*1
No improvement
after updating
Major Error
Codes and
Troubleshooting
(section 4-5-3)
*1: Messages and error codes will appear on LCD monitor or in viewfinder.
Fig. 4-1-1
Note:
1) Before troubleshooting or servicing, be sure to obtain customer approval for the following:
4.2.1 List of items to be reset
a) The image data stored on disc may be lost depending on the details and situation of fault
(defect).
b) The date/time and various settings, including video recording mode, designated by customer
after purchase may in some cases be reset to the defaults before purchase (factory settings).
2) Take note of settings on received product, referring to “4-2 System Resetting/Resetting Camera
Functions”: The notes will be necessary not only for resetting, but for checking defects that occur
under the particular setting conditions.
21
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.2.
SYSTEM RESETTING/RESETTING CAMERA FUNCTIONS
The VDR-M70/M50 has two types of reset function: “System reset” and “Resetting camera
functions”.
The reset operation will return the various settings to the defaults when the VDR-M70/M50
was shipped form factory.
Information:
If a defect occurs in product, take note of settings, and then execute system reset first: The defect
may disappear.
4.2.1.
List of items to be reset
Table 4-2-1 shows the items that will be reset to defaults at the factory by the two types of reset
operation: “system reset” and “resetting camera functions”.
Use the memo column provided in the table to enter the settings of any received device.
(1) Procedure for checking settings
1) Use a battery or the AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50.
2) Insert a DVD-RAM disc, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO”. For subsequent steps,
operate the VDR-M70/M50 while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
3) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen: Make sure of the
settings.
4) Operate the joystick to display the menu screens for record function setup, date function setup,
LCD monitor setup and initial setup in sequence, making sure of the settings.
At this time, the items on photo quality, external photo input and self-timer will not appear, since
they are related to photo recording: Check them in steps 6) and 7).
5) Set the power switch to “[CARD]PHOTO”. It is not necessary to insert a card at this time.
6) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen, and then operate the
joystick to display the record function setup menu screen in order to check the settings on photo
quality, external photo input and self-timer.
7) After checking is complete, press the MENU button to restore the ordinary screen.
22
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Table 4-2-1 List of items to be reset
Item
Camera
System
function
reset
reset
Default at
factory
Setting range
Yes: Will be reset
No: Will not be reset
Remarks
Camera Functions Setup
Program AE
Yes
Yes
Auto
Auto, Sports, Portrait,
Spotlight, Sand & Snow,
Low Light
White Bal.
Yes
Yes
Auto
EIS
Yes
Yes
On
Auto, Set, Outdoor,
Indoor1, Indoor2
On, Off
Dig. Zoom
Wind Cut
Cinema
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
40×
Off
Off
240×, 40×, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Low Light will not
appear when “VIDEO
mode: STD” is
specified.
Displayed on VDRM70PP only in the
Video mode
Displayed only in the
Video mode
Record Functions Setup
VIDEO Mode
Yes
Yes
FINE
Quality
Yes
Yes
FINE
Input Source
Yes
Yes
CAMERA
PHOTO Input
Self Timer
OSD Output
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Field
Off
On
With DVD-RAM disc:
XTRA, FINE, STD
With DVD-R disc:
FINE, STD
FINE, NORM, ECO
Displayed only in the
card photo mode
CAMERA, LINE, S LINE Diaplayed only on
models that have the
line input function (*1)
Frame, Field
On, Off
On, Off
Displayed only when
“Input Source:
CAMERA” is specified
Date Setup
Date Mode
Yes
Yes
M/D/Y
Date Set
Yes
No
1/1/2004
12:00AM
Brightness
Color Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Center
Center
Beep
Power Save
Record LED
Language
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On
Off
On
English
PM5:00 Y/M/D,
5:00PM M/D/Y,
17:00 D/M/Y
-----------------
LCD Setup
+
+
Initial Setup
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
English, French,
Spanish, German, Italian
*1: The line input function is provided in the following models:
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50GC
23
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Displayed only in the
Video mode
Memo
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.2.2.
System reset procedure
1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and
then disconnect the battery or AC adapter/
charger.
2) Use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the
RESET button for approx. 2 seconds.
RESET
Fig. 4-2-1
4.2.3.
Procedure for resetting camera functions
1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and place the VDR-M70/M50 in the recording pause
status; loading disc is not necessary at this time. For the following steps, operate VDR-M70/
M50 while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
3) Set the quick mode switch to “OFF”.
4) Press the MENU button to display the camera setting menu screen.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
6) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
7) Use the joystick to choose “YES”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed.
8) After reset, press the MENU button to close the camera setting menu.
24
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.3.
PROBLEM GUIDE
Check the following before judging that VDR-M70/M50 is faulty.
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Power supplies
Battery cannot be charged.
Is the DC power cord connected to AC adapter/charger?
Unplug it. If the DC power cord is connected, the AC adapter/charger will not
enter the charge status.
Is the battery abnormally hot?
Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, leave it as is until it cools down,
and then charge it again.
Has the battery been unused for a long time?
Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, and then reattach it. If the
battery is still not charged, it may be dead: Purchase a new one.
* If the battery does not charge after you try the above four procedures, it may
be dead: Purchase a new battery.
Battery weakens fast.
Is the ambient temperature is too low or high?
Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.)
Are you using the VDR-M70/M50 where the temperature is low?
A fully charged battery may be discharged sooner than usual at low
temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand.
Battery may be dead: Replace with a new one.
The performance of battery will deteriorate if it is used for an extended period of
time or frequently.
The CHARGE indicator on
Is the ambient temperature is too low or high?
Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.)
AC adapter/charger is
The battery may be over-discharged.
blinking.
Continue charging: The CHARGE indicator will change to a steady light, and
the battery will be charged normally.
Power turns off immediately Is battery charged?
after being turned on.
Charge it.
Power goes off unexpectedly. Is Power Save specified "On"?
The specifications state that the powered VDR-M70/M50 automatically
turns off if it is left for as long as 5 minutes without performing recording or
playback, with "Power Save: On" specified. Set the power switch to "POWER
OFF", and then turn VDR-M70/M50 on again. To stop automatic power
off, specify "Power Save: Off".
Power cannot be turned off. Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then
use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds).
Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the VDR-M70/
M50 accepts operation.
System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for
LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time
and each setting item as required.
25
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Pressing the REC button
will not start recording.
Recording starts but stops
immediately.
Cause and Correction
During recording
Is input image copy-guarded?
The specifications state that VDR-M70/M50 cannot record a copy-guarded
image.
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to
Disc cleaning method:
disc, or is disc scratched?
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
Clean the disc. If there is still no
circumference in
improvement, replace the disc.
axial direction.
[Never use solvent.]
Is some other AV device directly connected to the AV input/output jack of VDRM70/M50?
If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as AV selector, the
video signal may not be transmitted correctly. In such a case, reduce the number
of devices through which the video signal is transmitted, or connect AV device
directly.
Are you attempting to record image from video game or PC?
Depending on video game or PC, image cannot be recorded on VDR-M70/M50.
Power switch does not
change to PHOTO (disc).
LCD screen is hard to see.
Black dots or red, blue or
green dots always lit appear
on LCD screen or in
Viewfinder.
Focus is not correct.
Is the LOCK switch beside the power switch set to the left? Switch it to the right
to release the lock.
Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted?
Stop recording and adjust the brightness.
Is VDR-M70/M50 being used outdoors?
Use the viewfinder. When using LCD monitor, adjust angle so that LCD screen
is not exposed to direct sunlight.
The panels used for LCD monitor and viewfinder of VDR-M70/M50 are
produced using highly precise technology. However, 0.01% or less of total pixels
may not light (black dots) or may remain lit (red, blue, green dots). (The effective
amount of pixels on LCD panel is 99.99% or more.) This shows the limitations of
the current technology, and does not indicate a fault that will interfere with the
operation of LCD panel or operation of VDR-M70/M50.
Is it difficult to use auto-focus with the subject?
Focus manually.
Does "MF" appear?
The VDR-M70/M50 is set to manual focus. Focus the subject manually, or
release manual focus.
Is the diopter control of viewfinder correctly adjusted?
Adjust the diopter control.
In cases other than the above, set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then
reset it to a position other then “POWER OFF”.
26
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Cause and Correction
During playback
Recognition of disc is not
complete.
Pressing the playback
button will not start
playback.
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched?
Clean the disc.
Was the image recorded on a device other than VDR-M70/M50?
Playback of image recorded on devices other than VDR-M70/M50 may be
impossible.
Has scene been edited on a device other than VDR-M70/M50?
If a scene that was recorded on VDR-M70/M50 is edited on a device other
than VDR-M70/M50, playback may not be possible on VDR-M70/M50.
No playback image appears
on TV screen.
Is TV input selector set correctly?
If the TV has multiple video input jacks, check to see whether the correct input
jack was selected.
If VDR-M70/M50 is connected to VCR, set the input selector of VCR to
"external input (LINE)".
Is VDR-M70/M50 connected to TV correctly?
Check the connections.
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched?
Clean the disc.
Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and recorded?
The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with TBC (time base corrector)
circuit is used for playback.
Was recording of external input made with "Frame" specified?
Specify "Field" for "PHOTO Input" in record mode settings.
Is the TV volume control set correctly?
Adjust volume control on TV.
Did the image recorded from AV input/output jack have noise or disturbance?
Re-record image with no noise or disturbance.
Is a photo recorded on devices other than VDR-M70/M50 being played back?
The VDR-M70/M50 specifications allow it to play back photos that are
recorded conforming to DCF standard and have 80-4000 horizontal pixels x 603000 vertical pixels.
Make sure that the photo to be played back satisfies these specifications. Note
that even photos that satisfy the specifications may not be playable, depending
on the recording status.
The thumbnail of any photo that cannot be played back will appear in single
blue.
Is a photo with a large number of pixels being played back?
It will take some time to play back a photo with a large number of pixels.
Playback picture is
momentarily interrupted.
Poor playback picture.
Playback picture is greatly
distorted.
No sound.
Disc Navigation thumbnails
do not appear.
Photos on card cannot be
played back.
It will take some time to
play back photos on card.
27
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Cause and Correction
When connected to PC (when using provided software)
No drive icon appears on PC. Is VDR-M70/M50 turned on?
Connect the AC adapter/charger and set the power switch to a position other
than "POWER OFF".
Is PC connection cable properly plugged in?
Plug the PC connection cable connector completely into VDR-M70/M50.
Turn PC off and unplug the PC connection cable: Then restart PC and use the
PC connection cable to connect the VDR-M70/M50 and PC.
The USB device driver installed in PC is not properly recognized.
Restart PC. If the drive icon still does not appear, use "Refresh driver" in Device
Manager to reinstall the USB device driver.
If a yellow "!" mark is attached to some device in Windows Device Manager,
uninstall the USB device driver, and then reinstall it.
It is recommended that you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later.
A fatal exception 0A error
occurs while installing USB
driver in Windows 2000
Professional
Application is not normally Turn the PC and VDR-M70/M50 off, and try again.
run on PC.
DISC EJECT button does
The DISC EJECT button is invalid while VDR-M70/M50 is connected to PC.
not work when VDR-M70/
Start Windows Explorer, right-click the drive icon corresponding to
M50 is connected to PC.
VDR-M70/M50, and then click "Eject".
Disc cannot be ejected even
by operating Windows
Explorer or applications.
When the time stamp of file
on DVD-RAM disc is viewed
on PC, it is different from
the actual recording date/
time.
Error occurs in playback of
VDR-M70/M50 on PC
Error occurs during writing
to DVD-R disc.
Transfer of images stops.
Was DVD-MovieAlbbumSE (software provided with VDR-M70/M50)
started?
Terminate DVD-MovieAlbbumSE.
Since the file system of VDR-M70/M50 is operated on Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT), the time stamp will be GMT.
However, since the time lag information is recorded on disc, date/time display on
VDR-M70/M50 playback screen will be the actual recording date/time.
If error occurs with USB connection, the transfer rate is not sufficient.
It is recommended that you use a USB terminal conforming to USB2.0 when
connecting the DVD video camera/recorder.
The temperature of VDR-M70/M50 is too high due to continuous operation.
operation.
Disconnect the VDR-M70/M50 from PC, remove the disc from VDR-M70/M50,
set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then leave it as is until the
temperature decreases. After checking that the temperature has gone down,
use a brand-new disc and restart operation.
The USB terminal of PC may be faulty.
Connect the VDR-M70/M50 to another USB terminal of PC.
If your PC is desktop type, it is recommended that you use USB terminal on the
back of PC. If you are using USB2.0 extended card, it is also recommended that
you install the newest version driver provided each USB2.0 card maker.
28
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Cause and Correction
This problem may be solved if the software related to DVD-RAM/R/RW built
into PC is upgraded, or if the UDF driver is uninstalled. However, if the OS of
PC is Windows 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional, uninstalling the UDF
driver will make it impossible for the photos recorded on DVD-RAM disc in
VDR-M70/M50 to be read by the PC.
Video is not recognized by
Is the power switch of VDR-M70/M50 set to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc)”?
software in PC.
Set it to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc).
DVD-R disc cannot be played DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc. When playing back
back on DVDDVD-R disc on PC, use generally available DVD-R disc playback software.
MovieAlbumSE
Error appears when starting Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to DirectX8.1
DVD-MovieAlbumSE
Video written to hard disk of The specifications state that DVD-MovieAlbumSE complies only with images
PC using DVDrecorded on DVD-RAM disc: It cannot edit video (DVD-VR) data stored on hard
MovieAlbumSE copy tool
disk of PC. To edit image data stored on hard disk, copy the data to DVD-RAM
cannot be edited.
disc and then edit it.
When DVD -MovieAlbumSE Is a disc other than DVD-RAM loaded?
software provided with VDR- Load a DVD-RAM disc. DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc.
Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded.
M70/M50 is started,
1) Click the "Preference" button in the dialog box.
"Disc in Drive X: cannot be
2) Click "Preference".
used on MovieAlbum"
3) Click "Device Setting".
appears (a letter showing
4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column,
the drive where disc is
loaded appears in X).
and then click "OK".
An image that should have
Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded.
been recorded does not
1) Click the "Preference" button at the top right of DVD-MovieAlbumSE screen.
appear when DVD2) Click "Preference".
MovieAlbumSE is started.
3) Click "Device Setting".
4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column,
and then click "OK".
Executing “Export” on DVD- Do not choose “Simple Export”: If you do, reading will stop midway.
MovieAlbumSE will
interrupt reading midway
When executing “Export” on a) If photo is included in the range of “export”, it may take more time because
DVD-MovieAlbumSE, it will
data must be re-encoded and read.
take time to read
b) If “Divide by Maker” is not chosen, it may take some time because data will
be read while being re-encoded.
"Hardware Removal" results Making sure the ACCESS/PC indicator on VDR-M70/M50 goes out, turn
in error
the PC off, and then unplug the PC connection cable from VDR-M70/M50.
If your PC uses Windows 2000 Professional, the problem may be solved it you
install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later.
“USBNTMAP.SYS not
You have designated a folder which is different from that for Windows when
found” appears while
installing USB driver: Designate the correct folder.
installing USB driver
Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with the USB2.0
No USB HS (high speed)
card. You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker in
connection even when
USB2.0 card is used
order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed).
DVD-RAM/R/RW drive built
into PC cannot be used after
the provided software has
been installed.
29
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Cause and Correction
“DISC ERROR” appears
A disc that was write-protected using the write-protect setting tool (WPTOOL)
when releasing write-protect equipped with the UDF driver on the CD-ROM provided with this DVD video
camera/recorder cannot be released on this DVD video camera/recorder as is.
Use the write-protect setting tool on PC to release the write-protect.
The “capture” function of
The “capture” function of MyDVD is only for DVD camera with i.Link
MyDVD is unavailable.
connection: It is not available on this VDR-M70/M50.
Use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to import the images recorded on DVD-RAM disc into
the PC.
Miscellaneous
Power does not come on, or
no operation occurs by
pressing button.
The date and time are
incorrect.
No scene can be deleted.
Disc cannot be removed.
VDR-M70PP/M50PP cannot
be operated from remote
control.
Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then
use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds).
Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the VDR-M70/
M50 accepts operation.
System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for
LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time
and each setting item as required.
Has VDR-M70/M50 been subjected to impact?
The VDR-M70/M50 could be damaged.
Has the VDR-M70/M50 been left unused for a long period of time?
The internal backup battery may be discharged: Charge it. (Charge procedure:
Connect the AC adapter/charger to the VDR-M70/M50 and AC outlet, set
the power switch on VDR-M70/M50 to "POWER OFF", and then leave
them for at least 24 hours.)
Is the cursor placed on scene to be deleted?
Even if desired scenes are selected using yellow cursor, if there are the selected
scenes (in red frame), those scenes in red frame will be deleted. Check the color
of cursor and bar graph on the thumbnail display screen.
Is battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) connected?
With the VDR-M70/M50, a disc cannot be removed unless a power supply
is connected.
Has disc rotation stopped?
Making sure the disc stops, and then restart operation. Disc cannot be removed
until rotation has stopped.
Did you disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) while the
disc was being accessed?
Reconnect power supply, set the power switch to "VIDEO", and then remove the
disc after the sound showing the disc lock has been released is heard.
If the disc still cannot be removed, the VDR-M70/M50 is faulty: Refer to
"4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from Faulty VDR-M70/M50".
Is the remote control pointed at the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50?
Point it at the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50.
Is the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50 exposed to direct sunlight or
strong fluorescent light?
The remote control cannot operate VDR-M70/M50 when strong light
strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the position or angle of VDR-M70/M50.
Is there a battery in the remote control?
Also check the polarities of battery. Replace the battery if necessary.
Is VDR-M70/M50 powered?
Turn it on.
30
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Disc cover cannot be closed.
Operating sound is heard
cyclically.
VDR-M70/M50 vibrates.
Cause and Correction
Is disc correctly loaded?
Remove the disc and then reload it.
Is round DVD holder being used?
A bare disc that is not in round DVD holder, or is in a square cartridge or caddy,
cannot be used. Put disc in the round DVD holder.
Is round DVD holder inserted in the proper orientation?
Remove the round DVD holder, make sure of the orientation, and then reinsert
it.
Is VDR-M70/M50 turned on?
Connect the AC adapter/charger or full charged battery and set the power switch
to a position other than “POWER OFF”.
This sound is heard because the disc is cyclically operated; it does not indicate a
fault.
This does not indicate a fault.
These vibrations or sound are generated when the disc drive unit is operating.
Slight sound is heard from
VDR-M70/M50.
31
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.4.
MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Some messages may appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during operation.
If a message appears, refer to the following table and perform troubleshooting according to the
message.
Messages divided by broken lines will automatically appear in sequence from the upper row each
time the center of joystick is pressed.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
Battery is almost empty.
Replace it.
Appears if the battery is discharged.
Cannot combine scene.
Appears if an attempt is made to
combine unconnected scenes: The
specifications state that combining of
only multiple scenes is possible.
Appears if an attempt is made to
combine scenes when a photo was
selected: The specification state that
combining of only video scenes is
possible.
Appears when combining one scene was
attempted.
Appears when user performed deletion at
the upper limit of 999 scenes registered.
Cannot combine.
Deselect PHOTO scenes.
Cannot combine.
Select multiple scenes.
Cannot delete scenes.
Troubleshooting
Replace with a charged battery, or
use the AC adapter/charger to power
VDR-M70/M50.
Stop trying to combine scenes, or
create a play list containing the
scenes to be combined, and combine
them on the play list.
Select only video scenes, or stop
trying to combine scenes.
Select multiple scenes and then
combine them.
Combine divided scenes, and then
delete if necessary.*2
*1
Cannot execute.
Unselect multiple scenes.
Cannot execute.
Change display
category to All.
CANNOT RECORD
PHOTOS.
Appears if an attempt is made to select
multiple scenes for division: The
specifications state that dividing
multiple scenes is impossible.
Appears when combining or moving
scenes was instructed with “Category:
VIDEO or PHOTO” specified.
Appears if an attempt is made to record
photos on DVD-R disc: The specifications
state that no photo is recordable on
DVD-R disc.
Divide scenes one by one.
Specify “Category: All”, and then
operate VDR-M70/M50 again.
Use a DVD-RAM disc or card when
recording photos.
*1: the DVD video recording format defines the maximum number of entry points as 999: Since one entry
point is allocated to one scene, the maximum number of scenes recordable on disc with VDR-M70/
M50 is 999.
*2: If recording is continued without editing, one scene will comprise one cell for each entry point.
When scenes are combined, only the number of entry points will decrease (only the entry point is deleted);
the number of cells will not decrease. Assume, for example, that the number of cells before scenes are
combined is 999, which is the upper limit defined by the DVD video recording format. If a scene
comprising one cell is divided at two points and the scene between the divided scenes needs to be deleted,
the cell must be further divided in order to delete. However, since the number of cells has reached the
upper limit in this case, the cell cannot be divided and the scene cannot be deleted.
32
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
Cannot replace thumbnail
on PHOTO scenes.
Cannot select any more
scenes
CARD ALMOST FULL
Card error has occurred.
Format the card now?
Card error has occurred.
Formatting is not complete.
Card error has occurred.
Keep card inside & restart.
Card error.
Card full.
Card full.
Cannot execute.
Card is not formatted.
Format the card now.
YES NO
Appears when a photo thumbnail was
selected for change in scene editing
menu: The specifications stipulate that
the thumbnail of photo cannot be
changed.
Appears when the number of scenes
selected on card has exceeded the upper
limit of 999 scenes.
Appears when the remaining recordable
number of photos is less than 10 during
recording.
Appears when a card initialized on PC,
etc., or a card whose initialization was
interrupted before, is loaded.
Appears when a damaged card is
initialized.
Troubleshooting
Select a video to change the
thumbnail.
Release the selection of unnecessary
scenes.
Prepare another card, or delete
unnecessary photos.
Choose “YES” and designate it to
initialize the card (deleting all
recorded data).
Replace the card.
Appears when no photo could be recorded Set the power switch to “POWER
on card normally.
OFF”, and after several seconds, set
it to “[CARD]PHOTO”.
Initialize the card (deleting all
recorded data).
Appears when the card cannot be
Use a dry cloth to clean the card
recognized because its terminals are
terminals.
dirty.
Also appears when data other than
Replace the card.
photos is recorded on card.
Appears when the recording capacity of
Replace the card, or delete
card has reached the limit during
unnecessary photos
recording.
.
Appears when a card whose remaining
Replace the card, or delete
recording capacity is small, and on which unnecessary photos.
no photo can be recorded, is loaded.
Appears when the remaining capacity of Replace the card, or delete
card has reached the recordable limit.
unnecessary photos.
Appears when an unformatted card or a Choose “YES” and designate it when
card formatted on PC was loaded.
formatting card (deleting all recorded
data).
33
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Message
Control Information Error.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if mismatch has occurred
between the recorded video and the
scene information because editing was
performed near the limit of disc storage
capacity on a device other than VDRM70/M50; it also appears if the
control information file was operated.
Also appears when reading or writing
from/to recorded file cannot be performed
because the disc is dirty.
Troubleshooting
Update the control information.
(Start Disc Navigation, press the
MENU button, and then execute
“Update Control Info.” in the “Disc”
menu.
Clean the disc, or replace it.
Disc cleaning method:
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in
axial direction.
[Never use solvent.]
COPY PROTECT
Appears if an attempt is made to record
copy-guarded image. The specifications
state that copy-guarded image cannot be
recorded on VDR-M70/M50.
Data error in a part of image Appears if writing to file cannot be
completed normally because power was
file.
turned off by mistake during video
Repair disc now?
recording or editing, and an abnormality
YES NO
in part of the file is recognized.
Also appears when condensation occurs
on lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50.
Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved from a cold place to
a warm place.
*3:
a)
b)
c)
Stop trying to record.
Choose “YES” and designate partial
repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Choosing “NO” will display a
message for verifying initialization.*3
Do not execute repair, but set the
power switch to “POWER OFF” with
the disc loaded, and then leave the
VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place
until condensation disappears
(usually 1-2 hours).
Take care with the following when repairing video file:
If the disc is removed while it is being recognized, the repair function of video file will be invalid.
If the timing when power is turned off is inappropriate, normal repair may be impossible.
If the disc has data that was recorded on a device other than VDR-M70/M50, normal repair may be
impossible.
d) The repaired data may be different from the original recorded content because of partial deletion of a
defective portion.
e) The repaired data (only corrected portion in case of partial repair) will lose the original date/time
information because the information for date/time when repair was executed will be added.
f) If “all repair” is executed, repair will be made in the order of all videos and all photos, and the timesequential relationship of recorded contents may be lost.
34
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
Data error in all image file.
Repair all data now?
YES NO
DISC ××××
(4-digit alpha-numerals
showing the code of trouble
will appear in ××××.)
DISC ACCESS
DISC ALMOST FULL
Disc error
Disc error has occurred.
Finalizing is not complete.
Appears if writing to file cannot be
completed normally because power was
turned off by mistake during video
recording or editing, and it is recognized
that the video file must be totally
repaired.
Also appears when condensation occurs
on lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50.
Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved form a cold
place to a warm place.
Appears if the self-diagnosis function in
VDR-M70/M50 detects a serious
problem.
This message appears during normal
operation process, when VDR-M70/
M50 checks whether a proper disc
has been loaded or not. It is displayed for
a longer time period when the date has
changed.
This message appears during normal
operation process, when the recorded
images are being stored on disc.
Appears if the remaining video
recordable time on disc is less than 10
minutes, or the remaining number of
recordable photos is less than 10.
Appears when the disc has been edited
on a device other than VDR-M70/
M50, and mismatch has occurred in
recorded data.
Also appears when reading or writing
from/to recorded file cannot be performed
because the disc is dirty.
Appears when the disc could not be
finalized because it was dirty.
Appears if accident, such as power off,
has occurred during finalizing.
If the message still appears even when
the disc has been cleaned and finalized
again and again, the disc may be
defective.
35
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Choose “YES” and designate total
repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Choosing “NO” will display a
message for verifying initialization.
[Refer to *3 page 4-14]
Do not execute repair, but set the
power switch to “POWER OFF” with
the disc loaded, and then leave the
VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place
until condensation disappears
(usually 1-2 hours).
Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Self-Diagnosis Function and
Troubelshooting”.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace
the disc.
Format the disc (deleting all recorded
data), or replace the disc.
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” and reconnect the AC adapter/
charger; then set the power switch to
“VIDEO” and start finalizing again.
Or press the DISC EJECT button,
reload the disc, and then execute
finalizing.
Replace the disc.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Message
Disc error has occurred.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Disc error has occurred.
Formatting is not complete.
Disc error has occurred.
Keep disc inside & restart.
Disc full.
Cannot execute.
Disc has no data.
Disc has no PlayList.
Disc includes protected
scenes.
Delete scenes?
YES NO
Disc is full.
Cannot add control info.
Disc is not formatted.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears when a DVD-RAM disc
initialized on PC, etc., or a card whose
initialization was suspended before, is
loaded.
Appears when the disc could not be
normally formatted because it was dirty.
Also appears when a warped or distorted
disc was loaded, or a logically damaged
disc whose formatting was suspended is
loaded.
Appears if a problem has occurred during
editing of video file.
Appears if the recording capacity of disc
has reached the limit during editing of
video file.
Appears when the MANU button or
playback button was pressed with no
scene recorded.
Appears if switching of play list is
selected with no play list registered.
Appears if the loaded disc has a program
(scene) that is write-protected by the
software write-protect function, which is
effective in program units. Although the
VDR-M70/M50 is equipped with a
software disc-protect function that is
effective for disc units, it does not comply
with software write-protect for program
units. (The DVD Forum defines two
types of software protect for DVD-RAM
disc: disc units and program units.)
Appears if the number of scenes on play
list exceeds the upper limit (999) while
control information is being added.
[Refer to *1 page 4-12]
Appears when an unformatted DVDRAM disc or one initialized (other
UDF2.0) on PC is loaded.
Also appears if user rejects partial repair
or total repair of video file.
36
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Choose “YES” and designate it to
initialize the DVD-RAM disc
(deleting all recorded data).
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Replace the disc.
Exit the Disc Navigation function and
set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded; then
reconnect the AC adapter/charger
and set the power switch to “VIDEO”
or “PHOTO (disc)”. (The VDR-M70/
M50 will automatically repair
the video file.)
Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace
the disc.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Release the write-protect using the
device that has the software writeprotect function for program units, or
choose “YES” and designate it to
delete the scenes.
Delete any unnecessary scenes, or
combine several scenes, and then
operate the VDR-M70/M50.
When initializing it (deleting all
recorded data), choose “YES” and
designate it.
Choose “NO” and designate partial
repair or total repair. When
initializing it (deleting all recorded
data), choose “YES” and designate it.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
Disc is not formatted.
If it formats, it becomes
possible to use for camera.
However, when you record
from PC connection
terminal, please do not
format.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Disc overheat.
Please retry later.
Troubleshooting
Appears when a brand-new DVD-R disc
was loaded.
When recording on VDR-M70/M50,
choose “YES” and designate it.
When recording video edited on PC
connected via the PC connection
terminal, choose “NO” and designate
it.*4
Appears when the temperature inside
VDR-M70/M50, or the temperature of
disc, is too high, and normal operation
cannot be executed.
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a
well-ventilated place until the inside
temperature decreases.
Specify “Slide Show: All”, or do not
try slide show.
DPOF is not set to scene
Appears if “Slide Show: DPOF” is
specified when a card for which DPOF
has not been set is loaded.
DPOF scenes over limit.
Appears when the number of settable
Cannot set DPOF scenes.
scenes for DPOF has exceeded 999.
DVD-R Disc, Video mode
Appears if an attempt is made to change
cannot be changed.
the Video recording mode of a recorded
DVD-R disc. Once even one scene is
recorded on a DVD-R disc which has
been initialized, the originally
designated Video recording mode is
specified to be maintained until the final
recording on the disc.
Also appears after the DVD-R disc has
been initialized.
END OF DISC
Appears if the disc recordable capacity
has reached the limit during recording.
End scene cannot be divided. Appears when the last image of scene
was selected to divide the scene: The
specifications state that dividing a scene
at its end is not possible.
Error has occurred.
Appears if the self-diagnosis function of
Error code No. ××××
VDR-M70/M50 has detected a serious
Please read the manual.
problem when power was turned on,
(4-digit alpha-numerals
or the same trouble occurred three
showing the code of trouble
consecutive times in modes other than
will appear in ××××.)
recording.
Release unnecessary DOPF setting
on photos when newly setting DPOF.
Stop trying to change the Video
recording mode, or replace the disc.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Replace the disc.
Stop trying to divide a scene.
Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Self-Diagnosis Function and
Remedy”.
*4: The purpose of formatting DVD-R disc on VDR-M70/M50 is to write to disc a program exclusively
for camera recording that is necessary to record images shot by camera in real time (increasing the
response from disc). When recording images that were edited using PC on DVD-R disc via the PC
connection terminal, do not format the disc: The program used exclusively for camera recording will
disable normal recording.
37
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Message
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Error has occurred.
Please reinsert a disc.
Appears if, when power was turned on,
the self-diagnosis function of VDRM70/M50 detected a slight trouble
that can be fixed: See “4-5 SelfDiagnosis Function and
Troubleshooting” for details.
Appears if, when power was turned on,
Error has occurred.
the self-diagnosis function of VDRPlease restart.
M70/M50 detected a slighttrouble
that can be fixed by turning
power on again: See “4-5 Self-Diagnosis
Function and Troubleshooting” for
details.
Appears if repair has failed with DVDError occurred.
Please replace disc or format RAM disc after message “Data error in
all image file. Repair all data now?” or
disc
“Found error in image file. Repair data
now?” appeared.
Appears if repair has failed with DVD-R
Error occurred.
disc after message “Data error in all
Please replace disc.
image file. Repair all data now?” or
“Found error in image file. Repair data
now?” appeared.
Appears if the self-diagnosis function in
ERROR ××××
VDR-M70/M50 detects a serious
(4-digit alpha-numerals
problem during recording, or when the
showing the code of trouble
same trouble occurs three times
will appear in ××××.)
consecutively during recording.
Appears if accident, such as power off,
Finalize may not be
occurred during finalizing, and then
complete.
power was turned on again or disc was
Finalize again now?
YES NO
reloaded.
Found error in image file.
Appears if repair has failed after
Repair disc now?
message “Data error in a part of image
YES NO
file. Repair disc now?” appeared.
It is unrecordable on this
card.
Appears when a card other than SD
memory card or MultiMediaCard was
loaded.
38
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF”, press the DISC EJECT button,
and then reinsert the disc. After that,
set the power switch to “VIDEO” or
“PHOTO (disc)”.
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF”, reconnect the AC adapter/
charger or battery, and then set the
power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO
(disc)”.
Initialize the disc (deleting all
recorded data), or replace the disc.
Replace the disc.
Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Self-Diagnosis Function and
Troubelshooting”.
Choose “YES” and designate it to
finalize the disc.
Choose “YES” and designate total
repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Choosing “NO” will display a message
for verifying initialization. [Refer to
*3 on page 4-14]
Insert an SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
JPEG file related to scenes
are not found.
No card
No card. Please insert card.
NO DISC
Appears when an attempt is made to
copy photos on disc to card, when photo
(JPEG) file to be copied is not stored on
disc. When VDR-M70/M50 records
a photo on disc, two photo files will be
stored on disc - a photo (conforming to
DVD video recording format) file to be
displayed on VDR-M70/M50, and
a photo (JPEG) file for storage that is
linked to the photo for display. This
message will appear when only the photo
file for storage has been deleted on PC,
etc.
Appears when no card is loaded.
Appears when recording photos on card
was attempted with no card loaded.
Appears if no disc is loaded.
If the message appears even when a disc
is loaded, condensation might have
occurred on lens or drive of VDR-M70/
M50.
No more scenes.
Play List was deleted.
Appears during user operation; all
recorded scenes have been deleted and
cleared. The specifications stipulate that
a play list with no scene on it cannot be
held: If all registered scenes have been
deleted, the play list will also be deleted.
Play Lists over limit.
Appears if an attempt is made to create a
new play list or edit play list after the
number of registered play lists has
reached the upper limit (99) that is
defined by the DVD video recording
format.
Same scenes on PlayList will This message appears during user
be deleted.
operation, if even one play list has been
Delete scenes?
created during scene deletion. This
YES NO
message does not appear when a scene is
deleted from play list.
Scenes over limit.
Appears if an attempt is made to register
Cannot add scenes.
a new scene in play list, with the
specified 999 upper limit scenes
registered. [Refer to *1 page 4-12]
Scenes over limit.
Appears if an attempt is made to divide a
Cannot divide scenes.
scene with the specified 999 upper limit
scenes registered, or the number of
scenes will exceed 999 with division.
[Refer to *1 page 4-12]
39
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Copy photos to card via PC. The
photo (JPEG) file for storage is stored
in DCIM\100HPNX1 folder.
Insert a card.
Insert a card.
Load a disc
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a
dry place until condensation
disappears (usually 1-2 hours).
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Delete unnecessary scenes before
creating a new play list or editing
play list.
Choose “YES” and designate it to
delete selected scenes.
Delete unnecessary scenes from play
list before adding a new scene to it.
Delete unnecessary scenes before
dividing a scene.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Message
Scenes over limit.
Cannot move scenes.
Stop processing.
There was no scene which
can be deleted.
This card cannot be used.
Please replace card.
This disc cannot be used.
Please replace disc.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if an attempt is made to move a
scene at the upper limit of 999 scenes
registered, or the number of scenes will
exceed 999 by moving a scene. [Refer to
*1 page 4-12]
This message appears during operation
process. It will appear when user
interrupted any process by pressing the
stop/cancel button when processing
multiple scenes, etc.
Appears when only multiple locked
scenes were selected using the Disc
Navigation function, and deleting them
was attempted.
Appears when a card other than SD
memory card or MultiMediaCard was
loaded.
Appears when a type of disc that cannot
be used on VDR-M70/M50 was loaded.
Troubleshooting
Delete unnecessary scenes before
moving scenes.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 after
the message disappears.
Use the Disc Navigation function to
unlock the scenes, and then restart
operation.
Insert an SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard.
Check the type of disc and insert a
disc usable on VDR-M70/M50.
This disc is recorded by the
PAL system.
Please replace disc.
Appears when a disc recorded in the PAL Use a disc recorded in the NTSC
system was loaded: The VDR-M70/M50
system.
is exclusively for the NTSC system and
does not comply with the PAL system.
Top scenes cannot be
divided.
Appears when the first image of scene
was selected to divide the scene: The
specifications state that dividing a scene
at its top is not possible.
Appears when an unformatted or
logically damaged disc was loaded.
Also appears when a dirty disc was
loaded.
If the message appears when a normal,
formatted disc has been loaded,
condensation might have occurred on the
lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50.
Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved from a cold place to
a warm place.
UNFORMAT DISC
40
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Stop trying to divide a scene.
Format the disc (deleting all recorded
data), or replace the disc.
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a
dry place until condensation
disappears (usually 1-2 hours).
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Message
Troubleshooting
Use AC adapter/charger.
Appears if a battery is used when
finalizing a DVD-R disc. The
specifications state that DVD-R disc can
be finalized only when the AC adapter/
charger powers the VDR-M70/M50.
Terminate the Disc Navigation
function, set the power switch to
“POWER OFF” with the disc loaded,
remove the battery, and then connect
the AC adapter/charger: Finalize the
disc again.
Use AC adapter/charger.
Turn off power.
Appears if a battery is used when
repairing video files. The specifications
state that video files can be repaired only
when the AC adapter/charger powers the
VDR-M70/M50.
Appears if an attempt is made to copy
video to card. The specifications state
that no video is unrecordable on card.
Appears if a DVD-RAM disc that was
write-protected for disc units by software
disc-protect function is loaded, or if an
attempt is made to record on writeprotected disc.
Appears when an SD memory card
whose erasure prevention switch was
locked is loaded.
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded, remove
the battery, and then connect the AC
adapter/charger.
[Refer to *3 page 4-14]
Stop trying to copy a video, or select
photos and execute copy.
VIDEO scene cannot be
copied to card.
Write protected.
Check disc.
Write-protected.
Check card.
Release the software disc-protect.
Unlock the erasure prevention switch
of SD memory card.
Note:
The listed messages are subject to change without notice for improvement of performance.
41
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.5.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Restriction:
The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel. Do not disclose it to
persons other than service engineers.
The VDR-M70/M50 is equipped with a self-diagnosis function: If it detects a problem when
power is turned on or during operation, it will display a message, replace the content of problem
with an error code (4-digit alphanumeric characters), and then store it in flash memory.
4.5.1.
Message displayed by self-diagnosis function
There are two types of message displayed when the self-diagnosis function detects problems:
messages for minor problems, and messages for serious problems.
Information:
The messages of self-diagnosis function will be displayed until the power switch is set to “POWER
OFF” or the disc is removed, regardless of whether there is a minor or serious problem.
(1) Messages for minor problems
These messages appear when troubleshooting is likely
possible for the problem detected when power was turned
on, following the procedure below.
Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-1 appears:
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reconnect the AC
adapter/charger or battery, and then set the power
switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”.
Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-2 appears:
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, press the DISC
EJECT button, and then reinsert the disc. After that, set
the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”.
If the problem is handled by the procedure shown above,
servicing is not necessary in almost all cases. However, if
the VDR-M70/M50 cannot be restored from the problem
or the same problem recurs, appropriate servicing will be
required.
The information on minor problems will be stored in flash
memory as error codes (4-digit alphanumeric characters),
whether or not the VDR-M70/M50 is restored from
the problems. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash
memory” for how to display the stored error codes.
42
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
! Error has occurred.
Please restart.
Fig. 4-5-1 Message for Minor Problem
(1/2)
!
Error has occurred.
Please reinsert a disc.
Fig. 4-5-2 Message for Minor Problem
(2/2)
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(2) Messages for serious problems
These messages appear when solving the problem detected
when power is turned on or during operation is not likely by
turning power on again or reloading the disc: Error codes
(4-digit alphanumeric characters) will directly appear, and
similar messages will appear if a problem from the same
cause occurs three times consecutively during operation.
If messages for serious problems appear, perform
troubleshooting according to “4-5-3 Major error codes and
troubleshooting”.
The error codes appearing with messages will be stored in
flash memory. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash
memory” for how to display the stored error codes.
! Error has occurred.
Error code No. 1100
Please read the manual.
Fig. 4-5-3 Example of Message for
Serious Problem
(displayed in modes other than during
power on or recording)
ERROR : 1100
Fig. 4-5-4 Example of Message for
Serious Problem
(displayed during recording)
43
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.5.2.
Error codes stored in flash memory
(1) Displaying error codes and clearing them
Display method
1) Use the battery or AC adapter/charger to power VDRM70/M50, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO”.
Error codes
2) Display the error using the following button operation:
Press the SELECT button and release it; then, within 0.5
second, simultaneously hold down the SELECT and
FOCUS buttons for at least 3 seconds.
Display clearing method
1) Press the DISPLAY button.
After displaying and checking error code, be sure to clear
the error code display: If you neglect this, the error code
will always be displayed.
(2) Details of error code display
1) Error codes of 2 problems are displayed one above the
other.
The error code of the latest problem appears in the upper
row, and the error code of the problem that occurred
before appears in the lower row. However, when the
same problem occurs continuously, it will be judged as
one problem, and the same error code will not appear
continuously.
2) If only one error code is stored in flash memory, the error
code will appear in the upper row, and “0000” will appear
in the lower row.
3) If no error code is stored in flash memory, “0000” will
appear in both rows.
44
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
1100
0400
Fig. 4-5-5 Example of Error Code
Display
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.5.3.
Major error codes and troubleshooting
Table 4-5-1 shows the error codes that are likely to frequently appear, and troubleshooting when
they appear.
If error codes other than those listed in Table 4-5-1 appear, check with the factory for
troubleshooting.
Error code
Table 4-5-1 Major Error Codes and Troubleshooting (1/2)
Contents of problem
Troubleshooting
0400
Recognition of disc failed.
1100
Reading of data from disc failed.
10AE
10AF
0280
Disc physically damaged, i.g.,
scratched or distorted.
The optical pickup in disc drive unit
failed to move.
Recognition of disc failed. [This
message is likely to appear frequently
when the ambient temperature is too
low (0°C or less)].
2881
1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to
impact or vibrations at this time.
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next
page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted,
use another disc.
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).
3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
dirty, scratched or distorted.
Replace the disc.
1) Check the ambient temperature.
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it
is scratched or distorted, replace the disc.
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).
Disc cleaning method:
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in
axial direction.
[Never use solvent.]
3) Check to see whether or not condensation has
occurred. If condensation has occurred, set the power
switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and
then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place for
1-2 hours.
4) Replace the disc.
45
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Error code
3122
3126
3133
7601
7890
7791
3105
E000
EC87
F100
F526
F571
F572
F573
F600
F700
F924
FB24
FB34
FB44
Contents of problem
Troubleshooting
1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
Writing data file to disc failed.
Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to impact or
vibrations at this time.
It takes much more time than
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
necessary to process start or end of
disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
recording (timeout error).
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next
page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted,
Recording on DVD-R disc failed.
use another disc.
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).
3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
dirty, scratched or distorted.
Formatting DVD-RAM disc failed.
Format it again, or replace the disc.
When recording photo, writing data to 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
disc failed.
battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
Writing data to disc failed.
switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
Abnormal stop during reading or
Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to impact or
writing of data from/to disc.
vibrations at this time.
Buffer has overflowed during
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
recording.
disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
When starting recording, reading of
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it
data file on disc failed.
is scratched or distorted, replace the disc.
When recording photo, writing data to
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
disc failed.
(disc).
When recording video, writing data to 3) When using DVD-R disc:
disc failed.
Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
Backup error
dirty, scratched or distorted.
No response from disc drive even when
When using DVD-RAM disc:
3 minutes has elapsed (drive timeout
Initialize the disc (deleting all data recorded on
error).
disc), or replace the disc.
Recording failed
Initialization at start of recording
failed.
While recording mode was being
transferred to recording pause, writing
data to disc failed.
During processing of buffer overflow
error, writing data to disc failed.
Recording on DVD-RAM disc failed.
46
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.6.
CHECKING VERSIONS OF FIRMWARE AND UPDATING
The VDR-M70/M50 stores the 4 types of firmware shown in Table 4-6-1 in flash memory.
These firmware programs will be updated whenever necessary to improve the performance of VDRM70/M50.
Check to see whether any defects in VDR-M70/M50 can be eliminated by updating any firmware
programs: If improvement is likely, update them.
Information:
If any corrections in firmware are made at the factory, the information on how to obtain the
firmware data and create a disc or card containing upgraded firmware will be reported on service
bulletin, etc.
Table 4-6-1 List of VDR-M70/M50 Firmware Programs
Type of firmware
System firmware
Camera microprocessor
firmware
Drive main firmware
Drive core firmware
4.6.1.
Description
Software that drives SH CPU: Controls the operation of
entire system, including recording, playback, Disc
Navigation, connections with external device
Controls the operation of camera block (including optical
system), clock, battery, input/output
These programs control the DVD disc drive system
(mechanism block)
Remarks
Does not require
updating
Checking firmware versions
(1) Purpose
When checking whether updating firmware is needed or not, use the following procedure to view
the information display or version display screen (see Fig. 4-6-1) and check the version number.
Only the titles at top left of screens will be different when no disc is loaded or disc is loaded; the
other display contents will be the same.
(2) Version display/clear method
Display method
1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” to set VDR-M70/M50 to the recording pause status.
Operate VDR-M70/M50 while viewing the LCD screen or viewfinder from this point.
3) When a disc is loaded, press the DISC NAVIGATION button to display the thumbnail display
screen: This step is not necessary if no disc is loaded.
4) Operate the following buttons to view the detaill display screen (with no disc loaded) or version
display screen (with disc loaded):
Tilt the joystick up and hold it, then simultaneously press the SELECT button and REC buttons.
Display clearing method
1) Press the stop/cancel button to restore the thumbnail display screen. To return to the normal
screen, press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
47
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(3) Details of detaill/version display screens
When no disc is loaded
Table 4-6-2 Details of Information/Version Display Screens
Item
Model
System Ver.
Date
Cam Ver.
Drive (Main)
Drive (Core)
Display contents
Model name
Version number of system firmware
Date/time when system firmware was created
Version number of Camera microprocessor
firmware
Version number of drive main firmware
Version number of drive core firmware
Information:
Display ×××× on subsequent screen shows the numbers or
alphabets.
Detail
Model: DVR-M70-PAL
System: Ver. x.xx
Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
Cam: Ver. x.xx
Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
RETURN
When disc is loaded
Version
Model: VDR-M70-PAL
System: Ver. x.xx
Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
Cam: Ver. x.xx
Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
RETURN
Fig. 4-6-1
4.6.2.
Updating firmware
(1) Purpose
If you receive information from the factory that updating
firmware is needed, you should do it to improve the
performance, functions and operability of VDR-M70/M50.
48
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(2) Procedure for updating
1) Acquire the data for updating of firmware and create a disc or card for updating. Information on
how to obtain the firmware data and create a disc/card containing upgraded firmware will be
reported on service bulletin, etc.
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then use the AC adapter/charger to power the VDRM70/M50. A battery cannot be used because it may interrupt power of VDR-M70/M50
during work.
3) Insert the disc/card for updating firmware.
4) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” when using a disc for updating, or to “[CARD]PHOTO”
when using a card for updating.
5) After approx. 20 seconds, the updating start screen (Fig. 4-6-2) will appear, and the firmware
programs will be automatically updated thereafter. During updating, the screens showing that
designated firmware program is being updated will appear, followed by the screen showing that
updating is complete.
However, not all firmware programs need updating every time: The same version screen will
appear for firmware programs that do not require updating.
6) When all required updating is complete, the screen for verifying the version of updated firmware
will appear, and the updated firmware will be displayed in red.
7) To complete updating, set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then remove the disc/card for
updating.
Updating Start Screen
Firmware Update
Start Firmware update.
System Update Screen
Firmware Update
Updating system.
Do not turn off power.
Drive (Core) Update Screen
Firmware Update
Updating drive (Core).
Please wait about 20 seconds.
Updating Completed Screen
Firmware Update
Drive (Main) Update Screen
Firmware Update
Updating drive (Main).
Please wait about 2 minutes.
Do not turn off power.
Screen of Verifying the Version
Firmware Update
Model: VDR-M70-PAL
Firmware updated.
System: Ver. ×.××
Drive (Main): ××××.××.××.REV
Drive (Core): ××××.××.××.REV
Do not turn off power.
Turn off power
Same Version Screen
Firmware Update
Same revision.
Cannot update.
Fig. 4-6-2
49
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.7.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Information:
1) Use the VFK0631 adapter/charger to power VDR-M70/M50 for trouble diagnosis.
2) The trouble diagnosis table was prepared presupposing that the circuit boards have been
normally attached and connected. Therefore, make sure beforehand that the circuit boards are
correctly connected, that connectors and cables are not damaged, and that the status of their
connections is correct.
Prohibition:
During trouble diagnosis, never look directly into the objective lens of optical pickup block in disc drive
unit, and take great care that the reflected laser beam does not enter your eye.
4.7.1.
Trouble diagnosis table
Interpreting the trouble diagnosis table:
1) Search for the defective symptom. If there are multiple check points or multiple details of check
for one symptom, check the items from the top down.
2) Set the VDR-M70/M50 to a service position that matches the symptom. There are four
service positions (A)-(D) for VDR-M70/M50. Set to the appropriate service position,
referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to enable service position”.
If only dashes — are entered in the service position column, trouble diagnosis is possible without
disassembling the VDR-M70/M50.
3) Connect the measurement terminals to the check points, and collate the results with the details
of check.
Letters in brackets [ ] that follow the check points show the name and side of circuit board.
Example: [MAN-A] shows that the check point exists on side A of MAN-H/MAN circuit board.
Information:
The MAN-H/MAN or AEL-H/AEL circuit board has some check points to which no terminals of test
equipment can be directly connected even when the VDR-M70/M50 is set to a service position.
Solder a lead wire of approx. 10 cm to such check points, referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to
enable service position” and “circuit board diagrams”. When trouble diagnosis is complete, be sure
to remove the lead wire.
4) Perform troubleshooting according to the check results, referring to the troubleshooting columns.
50
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Table 4-7-1 Trouble Diagnosis Table
Symptom
Service
position
No power
Check points
F0501
F0502
F0503
F0504
TL0504
[MAN-B]
[MAN-B]
[MAN-B]
[MAN-B]
[MAN-B]
IC1503- 53 to 56
[MAN-B] (Do not
solder lead wire)
TL0510 [MAN-A]
TL0511 [MAN-B]
TL0512 [MAN-A]
TL0513 [MAN-A]
TL0515 [MAN-A]
TL0517 [MAN-A]
TL0518 [MAN-B]
Date/time is
incorrect
TL7041 [AEL-B]
Auto-focus does
not operate.
-----
-----
No zoom works
even if zoom lever
is operated.
-----
-----
TL1543 [MAN-B]
Detail of check
Is fuse blown?
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
Is the voltage approx. 3.2 V No:
DC (REG ON) when the
power switch is set to
"VIDEO" or "PHOTO" from
"POWER OFF"?
Can approx. 3 V DC (SYS3V)
be confirmed?
Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
Can approx. 1.5 V DC
(C1.6V) be confirmed?
Can approx. 3.2 V DC
(CAM3V) be confirmed?
Can approx. 4.8 V DC
(CAM5V) be confirmed?
Can approx. 3 V DC (D3V)
be confirmed?
Can approx. 5 V DC (D5V)
be confirmed?
Can approx. 2.5 V DC
(D2.5V) be confirmed?
Can approx. 15 V DC (C15V)
be confirmed?
Can approx. 3 V DC (B/U3V) Yes: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
be confirmed?
No: Replace BA1801.
Even if manual focus is set
Yes: Replace lens unit.
and +/- buttons are operated, No: Replace MAN-H/
focus is not correct, and
MAN circuit board.
when power is turned on
again, abnormal sound is
heard from the lens and it
takes more than 20 seconds
before an image appears.
Yes: Replace lens unit.
No zoom is operated by the
remote control, and when
power is turned on again,
abnormal sound is heard
from the lens and it takes
more than 20 seconds before
an image appears.
Can change in voltage be
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
confirmed when lever is
MAN circuit board.
operated (T/W)?
No: Replace rear cover.
51
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Troubleshooting due to
check results
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Service
position
DISC EJECT
button does not
operate
REC button does
not operate
TL1547 [MAN-B]
Left button/
joystick does not
operate
TL7030 [AEL-B]
QUICK MODE
switch does not
operate
TL7028 [AEL-B]
No image on LCD
monitor
No image in
viewfinder (EVF)
Block noise
appears during
video recording
Camera recorded
image is abnormal
No image from AV
input/output
terminal
TL0522 [MAN-A]
-----
----TL3418 [LCD]
TL3715 [AEL-B]
Close LCD
monitor
-----
-----
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
[MAN-A]
----TL6010 [MAN-B]
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
No: Replace rear cover.
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
No: Side case-L or parts
on the SWL2 circuit
board faulty.
Can change in voltage be
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
confirmed when switch
MAN circuit board.
(KEY2) is moved?
No: Replace SW8017 on
SWL3 circuit board.
Does backlight turn on?
Yes: Replace LCD unit.
Can approx. 5 V DC (INV5V) Yes: Q3451 or Q3452
be confirmed?
and its peripheral
circuits are faulty.
No: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
Can video signal (EVF-G) be Yes: Replace EVF unit.
No: Replace IC3701.
confirmed?
----------
Replace MAN-H/MAN
circuit board.
Can sensor drive pulses (V1- No:
4, H1, H2, RG) be confirmed?
V1 & V3 Pulse
15
0
-7
Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
V2 & V4 Pulse
H1 & H2 Pulse
0
3.3
RG Pulse
13.3
-7
0
10.0
Can video signal (CCD-OUT) Yes: Replace MAN-H/
be confirmed?
MAN circuit board.
No: With VDR-M70,
replace IC1001.
With VDR-M50,
replace lens unit.
Does image appear on LCD No: Replace MAN-H/
monitor or in EVF?
MAN circuit board.
Can video signal (VIDEO) be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
confirmed?
No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
52
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
check results
Can change in voltage be
confirmed when button is
operated (EJECT SW)?
Can change in voltage be
confirmed when button
(REC) is pressed?
Can change in voltage be
confirmed when button/
joystick (KEY1) is moved?}
-----
TL2084
TL2085
TL2086
TL2089
TL2090
TL2091
TL2095
TL2082
Troubleshooting due to
Detail of check
Check points
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Service
position
No sound from
speaker
Troubleshooting due to
check results
TL1534 [MAN-B]
TL1535 [MAN-B]
No audio from AV
input/output
terminal
Audio from builtin microphone
cannot be recorded
Audio from
external
microphone cannot
be recorded
Even if a normal
disc is inserted,
message "DISC
ACCESS"
continues to
appear, and the
disc is not
recognized.
Message "NO
DISC" appears
approx. 1 second
after a normal disc
is inserted.
Message "NO
DISC" appears
within 10 seconds
after a normal disc
is inserted.
Detail of check
Check points
-----
Can audio signal (SP_OUT+, Yes: Replace disc cover.
SP_OUT-) be confirmed?
No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
TL6006 [MAN-B] Can audio signal (AUD-L,
Yes: Replace MAN-H/
TL6009 [MAN-B] AUD-R) be confirmed?
MAN circuit board.
No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
IC6101-1, 7, 8, 14 Can audio signal (MIC_INL, No: Built-in
[AEL-A]
MIC_INR) be confirmed?
microphone, or
(Do not solder lead
IC6101 and its
wire)
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
TL6101 [AEL-B]
Can audio signal (MIC_INL, Yes: IC6201 or its
TL6102 [AEL-B]
MIC_INR) be confirmed?
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
No: Q6101-6104,
Q6108, Q6109,
Q6207, Q6208 or
their peripheral
circuits are
faulty.
IC6201-3, 4
Can audio signal
Yes: IC6201 or its
[AEL-A]
(EXTMIC_LCH,
peripheral circuits
(Do not solder lead EXTMIC_RCH) be
are faulty.
wire)
confirmed?
No: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit
board.
-------------Replace disc drive unit.
-----
-----
----------
-----
-----
----------
53
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
If the DRF-H/DRF circuit
board is not damaged or
its connection status is
normal, replace disc drive
unit.
Replace disc drive unit.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Symptom
Even when a disc
not protected is
inserted, message
"Write protected.
Check disc"
appears.
Even when a
formatted disc is
inserted, message
"Disc is not
formatted"
appears.
4.7.2.
Service
position
Check points
Detail of check
-----
-----
----------
-----
-----
----------
Troubleshooting due to
check results
Replace disc drive unit.
Service position
Service extension cablextension cables
This model is required the following extension cables for connections.
Note 1:
Use the following extension cables when checking or adjusting individual circuit boards expect module parts.
VDR-M70
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part No.
VFK1877
VFK1878
VFK1582A1625
VFK1442
VFK1575C2325
VFK1716
VFK1480
VFK1282
VFK1441
VFK1388
Connection
(MAN) - PG7001 (AEL)
(MAN) - PG2301 (DRF)
(MAN) - LENS (CCD)
(MAN) - DISC COVER
(AEL) - LENS UNIT
(AEL) - PG3401 (LCD)
(AEL) - PG8012 (L CASE)
(SHE) - EVF
(MAN) - REAR COVER
(MAN) - BATTERY COVER
Pin
120PIN 0.4 BtoB
70PIN 0.4 BtoB
16PIN 0.5 FFC
21PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC
23PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC
25PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC
6PIN 0.5 FFC
22PIN 0.5 FFC
8PIN 0.5 FFC
8PIN 0.5 FFC
Remarks
PG1501
PG2002
PG2001
PG1502
PG1301
PG7008
PG7004
PG0153
PG1503
PG0501
Connection
(MAN) - PG7001 (AEL)
(MAN) - PG2301 (DRF)
(MAN) - LENS (CCD)
(MAN) - DISC COVER
(AEL) - LENS UNIT
(AEL) - PG3401 (LCD)
(AEL) - PG8012 (L CASE)
(SHE) - EVF
(MAN) - REAR COVER
(MAN) - BATTERY COVER
Pin
120PIN 0.4 BtoB
70PIN 0.4 BtoB
14PIN 0.5 FFC
21PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC
22PIN 0.5 FFC
25PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC
6PIN 0.5 FFC
22PIN 0.5 FFC
8PIN 0.5 FFC
8PIN 0.5 FFC
Remarks
PG1501
PG2002
PG2001
PG1502
PG1302
PG7008
PG7004
PG0153
PG1503
PG0501
VDR-M50
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Part No.
VFK1877
VFK1878
VFK1364
VFK1442
VFK1282
VFK1716
VFK1480
VFK1282
VFK1441
VFK1388
54
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
55
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.7.3.
Check points
Overview of check points for Side A and B of MAN-H P.C.B. and Side B of AEL-H P.C.B. are as
follows.
Refer to C Circuit Board Diagrams.
TL6101
TL6102
TL3715
TL0522
MAN-H/MAN P.C.B.
Side A
TL2090 TL2085 TL2086 TL2082
TL2089 TL2091 TL2084 TL2095
TL0510
TL0513
TL0515
TL7030
TL7028
TL7041
TL3701(GND)
AEL-H/AEL P.C.B.
Side B
TL0512
TL0517
: Check points (TL: Test land)
Fig. 4-7-3 Side B of AEL-H/AEL P.C.B.
TL0520(GND)
TL0521(GND)
TL0518
TL1547
TL0504 TL0511TL1543
TL1534
TL1535
MAN-H/MAN P.C.B.
Side B
TL6006
TL6009
TL6010
: Check points (TL: Test land)
Fig. 4-7-2 Side A and B of MAN-H/MAN P.C.B.
56
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.8.
4.8.1.
PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING DISC FROM FAULTY VDR-M70/M50
Item to be checked
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply), making sure the ACCESS
indicator turns off, and then press the DISC EJECT button again.
Note: Even with normal product, the disc cannot be removed while the ACCESS indicator is lit or
blinking.
Information:
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply) before pressing the DISC
EJECT button.
The DISC EJECT button will work even if a power supply is not connected.
Prohibition
After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger of battery from VDR-M70/
M50.
The VDR-M70/M50 has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If laser beam strikes
your eye, it could cause serious vision damage.
4.8.2.
How to remove disc
If the disc cannot be ejected after performing “4-8-1 Item to be checked”, remove it using the
procedure in this section.
Information:
Numbers in diagrams are step numbers of setting procedure, and letters in brackets [ ] show the
types of screw.
1) Turn the hood in the direction of the arrow
to remove it.
2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove
the filter piece, being careful not to scratch
the lens surface with screwdriver at this
time.
3) Remove the lens cover in the direction of the
arrow.
4) Remove the space sheet that covers the
opening for operating lock arm.
5) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver,
etc. to move the lock arm in the direction of
the arrow, and then open the disc cover.
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)
LENS
COVER
1)
DISC
COVER
2) [A]
HOOD
3)
LOCK ARM
Information:
When reinstalling removed components, use
the reverse procedure to removal.
Fig.4-8-1
57
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
FILTER
PIECE
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.9.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Restriction:
The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel: Do not disclose it to
persons other than service engineers.
4.9.1.
Forced formatting of DVD-RAM disc
(1) Application/Symptom
Perform this procedure when the Disc Navigation screen does not start normally due to a defect in
data on disc and formatting is not possible by the procedure explained in instruction manual.
(2) Operational procedure
Caution:
1) Initialization will delete all data on disc: Copy the necessary files to PC, etc.
2) Do not turn power off or remove the disc during initialization: Such an interruption will make the
disc unusable.
1) Use the AC adapter/charger to power VDR-M70/
M50, and set the power switch to “VIDEO” or
“PHOTO”.
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger for formatting
disc: If power is interrupted during work, the disc could
become unusable.
2) Make sure that the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted is
free from dirt or scratch. If the disc is dirty, clean it; if
the disc is scratched, replace it. Any dirt or scratch on
disc could disable normal formatting. (Fig. 4-9-1)
3) Insert the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted.
4) After the disc is recognized, operate the following buttons
to display the disc formatting screen (Fig. 4-9-2):
Hold down the SELECT, REC and + (plus) buttons
simultaneously for at least 3 seconds
5) Use the joystick to choose “YES” and press the center of
joystick:
The initialization will start and message “Formatting ...”
will appear.
6) When formatting is complete, message “Finished” will
appear for several seconds, and then the normal screen
will automatically be restored.
58
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in
axial direction.
[Never use solvent.]
Fig. 4-9-1 Disc cleaning method
Format Disc
!
Disc is not formated.
Format the disc now?
YES
NO
ENTER
Fig. 4-9-2 Screen for Disc Formatting
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4.9.2.
EEPROM data backup and write
(1) Application
Perform this work whenever you replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board on which the EEPROM is
mounted.
Create a backup file of the data in EEPROM to be replaced in a PC, and write the backup file to
new EEPROM: Some adjustment items that are performed after replacement can be omitted.
Refer to “6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major Components” for adjustment
items that can be omitted.
(2) Preparations
1) Connect the VDR-M70/M50, jig/tool and power supply as shown in Fig. 4-9-3.
Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data” and “6-1-2 Power
Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data” for details on jig/tool and power supply in the
figure.
2) Copy the adjustment program to HDD of PC.
Refer to “6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program” for copying.
3) Start the adjustment program in order to display the adjustment menu screen on PC display.
Prohibition:
Completely assemble the VDR-M70/M50; create backup file of EEPROM data and write it
with only the adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 4-9-3).
Do not attempt to perform work with the VDR-M70/M50 disassembled: Doing so is very
dangerous because the VDR-M70/M50 incorporates high-voltage circuits and a laser emitter
block.
Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/
M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could
cause a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.
59
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
REMOVE THE
ADJUSTMENT COVER
DC POWER
CORD
To AC OUTLET
SKYLARK
CONNECTION
JIG
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
(5V/1A)
RED
GND
(PIN 16)
SD
RD
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)
POWER CABLE
VFK0631
BLK
PC
BLK
WHT
YEL
RS-232C
CABLE
DSP-R JIG
Fig. 4-9-3 Connections when creating backup file of EEPROM data and writing
60
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(3) Backup method
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Information:
If it is not possible to back up the data in EEPROM to be
replaced because the VDR-M70/M50 is not turned on,
etc., replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, and then
refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write”.
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
1
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
3) Choose Original Data Backup on the DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen.
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
Note:
Do not choose “Initial Data Write” on the DATA
INITIALIZE MENU.
Refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write” after backup for
“Initial Data Write”.
4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to proceed with the BACKUP FILE
SELECT screen.
5) From the BACKUP FILE SELECT screen, select or set
the names of folder and file in which the data is stored.
This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and
“backup.eep” for explanation: Freely select and set easyto-understand names.
6) Click the SAVE button on BACKUP FILE SELECT
screen to start backup.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
7) When backup is complete, the BACKUP FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
8) Then click the RETURN buttons on each menu screen to
restore the MODEL SELECT screen, and click the EXIT
button on MODEL SELECT screen to exit the
adjustment program.
9) Disconnect the VDR-M70/M50, jig/tool and power
supply, and then replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board.
DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen
Data Initialize
FILE MENU
Initial Data Write
Backup Data Write
Original Data Backup
8
4
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
BACKUP FILE SELECT screen
?
EEP
Look in (T):
5
6
File name (N):
backup
Save (S)
File of type (T):
.eep
Cancel
*
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
EEPROM Data Backup
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
BACKUP FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
FINISHED READING DATA
OK
61
3
7
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
ADJUST MENU screen
(4) Write method
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
Restrictions:
Never write data of any other product.
The EEPROM data includes adjustment values, etc. that
are peculiar to that product: It is different for each
product even if the model is the same.
If you write the data of another product by mistake,
rewrite the correct data.
ADJUST MENU
1
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
3) Choose Backup Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen.
4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to proceed with the WRITE FILE
SELECT screen.
5) From WRITE FILE SELECT screen, select the folder
and file in which the data has previously been backed
up.
This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and
“backup.eep” for explanation.
6) Click the OPEN button on WRITE FILE SELECT screen
to start writing.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
7) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
8) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen,
and then perform adjustment according to “6-3-2 List of
Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major
Components”.
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen
Data Initialize
FILE MENU
Initial Data Write
Backup Data Write
3
Original Data Backup
8
4
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
WRITE FILE SELECT screen
?
EEP
Look in (T):
backup.eep
5
6
File name (N):
backup.eep
Open
File of type (T):
*.eep
Cancel
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
DATA INITIALIZE
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
FINISHED WRITING DATA
OK
62
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
7
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
5 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
5.1.
ITEM TO BE CHECKED
(1) Checking Disc
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery (power supply), and then press the DISC
EJECT button to make sure that no disc is inserted. After check, close the disc insertion block.
If the disc insertion block does not open normally, refer to “4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from
Faulty VDR-M70/M50”.
Prohibition
After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger or battery from the VDRM70/M50.
The VDR-M70/M50 has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If Laser beam strikes
your eye, it could cause serious vision damage.
(2) Checking Card
Make sure that no card is loaded in the card slot. After check, close the card slot cover.
5.2.
ORDER OF DISASSEMBLY
Refer to “Disassembly Flowchart” in Fig. 5-2-1 for the order of removing components.
When reassembling components, use the reverse order to removal unless otherwise specified.
Note:
When replacing components, be sure to use only those shown in “Replacement Parts List”.
Information:
1) Board names suffixed with “-H” are for VDR-M70.
2) The procedures for disassembling and reassembling the VDR-M70 and VDR-M50 are the
same, except for the following components:
a) SHE-H circuit board
b) SHE circuit board
c) Accessory shoe
d) Lens unit (SEN-H circuit board, CCD image sensor, crystal filter, cushion)
3) The lens unit in VDR-M50 includes components equivalent to cushion, crystal filter, CCD
image sensor and SEN-H circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in VDR-M70.
63
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Reading Disassembly Flowchart:
After locating the target component in the flowchart, remove all components of the target in
sequence, following the arrows (routes) from the top of flowchart. If multiple routes exist to the
target component from the top of flowchart, remove all the components on all the routes.
Parts Name
Item No.
Adjustment cover
5-3
(1)
Food
Filter piece
Lens cover
5-3
(2)
SAF-H/SAF
circuit board
L-Block
5-3
(3)
Side case-L
LCD Unit
SWL2 circuit board
Side case-L
5-3
(7)
LCD case-U
MR circuit board
Fulcrum block
Front block
R-Block
VDR-M70
SHE-H circuit board
Accessory shoe
Jack cover
5-3
(5)
FRT-H/FRT
circuit board
Microphone
Microphone cover
5-3
(6)
5-3
(4)
Disc cover
5-3
(9)
5-3
(11)
AEL-H/AEL
circuit board
MAN-H/MAN
circuit board
5-3
(14)
5-3
(4)
VDR-M50
SHE circuit board
5-3
(12)
VDR-M50
Accessory shoe
5-3
(13)
Link bracket
5-3
(16)
Drive block
Side case-L
Fulcrum cover-U
Fulcrum cover-B
Fulcrum unit
5-3
(19)
LCD case-B
LCD circuit board
5-3
(20)
Hand strap
5-3
(10)
Front case
USB holder
USB-H/USB
circuit board
Rear cover
EVF unit
5-3
(10)
Camera block
5-3
(15)
Loader
DRF-H/DRF
circuit board
DVD Disc drive unit
Lock unit
Frame
5-3
(17)
Fig. 5-2-1
64
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5-3
(8)
5-3
(18)
VDR-M70
GYR-H circuit board
Lens frame
Lens unit
Cushion
Crystal filter
CCD image sensor
SEN-H circuit board
5-3
(21)
VDR-M50
GYR circuit board
Lens frame
Lens unit
5-3
(22)
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
5.3.
DISASSEMBLY
Information:
Numbers in disassembly procedure diagrams are step numbers for disassembling order, and letters
in brackets [ ] show the types of screw. Letters in brackets ( ) show the name of parts.
(1) Adjustment Cover
1) Open the LCD monitor (b).
2) Insert a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver
(d) into the groove of adjustment cover (a),
and remove the adjustment cover in the
direction of the arrow, being very careful not
to scratch the adjustment cover or side
case-L (c) with screwdriver.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Adjustment cover
LCD monitor
Side case-L
Flat-bladed screwdriver
(b)
1)
(c)
(a)
(d)
2)
Fig. 5-3-1
(2) Hood, Filter Piece and Lens Cover
1) Turn the hood (a) in the direction of the
arrow to remove it.
2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove
the filter piece (b), being careful not to
scratch the lens surface with screwdriver at
this time.
3) Remove the lens cover (c) in the direction of
the arrow.
(a) Hood
(b) Filter piece
(c) Lens cover
(b)
(c)
1)
3)
2) [A]
(a)
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)
Fig. 5-3-2
65
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(3) SAF-H/SAF Circuit Board and L Block
1) Open the LCD monitor (c).
2) Remove three screws [A], two screws [N] and three screws [C].
3) Close the LCD monitor and open the L block (b) from the rear in the direction of the arrow:
Be careful not to damage the SAF-H/SAF circuit board (a) or flat cable between L block and R
block (d).
4) Remove the SAF-H/SAF circuit board. The SAF-H/SAF circuit board is a film-like board:
Do not bend or fold it.
5) Disconnect the flat cable between L and R blocks. Disconnect the flat cable between L and R
blocks: Do not forcibly pull out the flat cable from connectors at this time.
6) Remove the L block from R block (d) in the direction of the arrow.
(1)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
SAF-H/SAF circuit board
L block
LCD monitor
R block
(2)
(d)
2) [C]
2) [A]
5)
(b)
(c)
2) [A]
4)
1)
(a)
6)
Pattern no,
printed side
3)
2) [C]
2) [N]
Fig. 5-3-3 Right side
2) [N]
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)
[N] M1.7x4 (Silver)
[C] M1.7x4 (Silver)
2) [A]
Fig. 5-3-4 Bottom Side
66
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(4) Front Block and R Block
1) Open the jack cover (c), and then remove one
screw [N].
2) Remove one screw [N].
3) Remove the FRT-H/FRT circuit board (d)
from AEL-H/AEL circuit board (e) in the
direction of the arrow.
4) Remove the front block (a) from R block (b)
in the direction of the arrow.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Front block
R block
Jack cover
FRT-H/FRT circuit board
AEL-H/AEL circuit board
(b)
(a)
4)
(e)
3)
1) [N]
(d)
[N] M1.7x4 (Silver)
2) [N]
(c)
(5) Jack Cover
1) Release the two tabs, and then remove the
jack cover (a).
(a) Jack cover
(b) Front block
Fig. 5-3-5
(b)
Tabs
(a)
Fig. 5-3-6
(6) FRT-H/FRT circuit board, Microphone,
and Microphone Cover
FRT-H/FRT circuit board (a)
1) Disconnect the flat cable from microphone.
2) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the
FRT-H/FRT circuit board.
Microphone (b) and Microphone Cover (c)
3) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the
microphone and microphone cover from the
front case (d).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
FRT-H/FRT circuit board
Microphone
Microphone cover
Front Case
2) [D]
(a)
(d)
1)
3) [D]
(b)
(c)
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
Fig. 5-3-7
67
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(7) Side Case L, LCD Unit, and SWL2 Circuit Board
1) Unplug the connector. Be sure to hold the connector using tweezers, etc. when unplugging it.
Pulling the cable when unplugging the connector could cause wire disconnection.
2) Remove five screws [D].
3) Remove two screws [E], and then remove the LCD unit (b) and ground plate (d) from side case-L
(a).
4) Disconnect the one flat cable.
5) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the SWL2 circuit board (c).
Note:
Take great care when handling the LCD unit The LCD unit has an LCD panel that is a precision
component. Subjecting it to impact could result in a fault.
(1)
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
(1) Unlock
(2)Pull
[E] M2x5 (Silver)
(2)
2) [D]
(1)
(c)
4)
(a)
5) [D]
2) [D]
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Side case-L
LCD unit
SWL2 circuit board
Ground plate
L cover
SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board
(d)
3) [E]
(b)
Fig. 5-3-9
68
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
(e)
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(8) LCD Case-U, MR Circuit Board, and Fulcrum Block
LCD Case-U (a)
1) Insert an awl (e), etc. into the screw hole, and turn the screw-hole bracket of fulcrum block 90° in
the direction of the arrow.
At this time, make no mistake with the turning direction: Turning in the wrong direction will
deform fulcrum cover U.
2) Turn the fulcrum block 90° in the direction of the arrow.
3) Remove three screws [B].
4) Release the six tabs, and then remove the LCD case-U in the direction of the arrow. The MR
sheet (f) will detach at this time: Take care not to lose it.
MR Circuit Board (b)
5) Disconnect the MR circuit board from the LCD circuit board (g).
6) Remove the MR circuit board in the direction of the arrow. The MR circuit board is a film-like
board: Do not bend or fold it.
Fulcrum Block (c)
7) Disconnect the one flat cable.
8) Remove the fulcrum block in the direction of the arrow.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
LCD case-U
MR circuit board
fulcrum block
LCD circuit board
Awl
MR sheet
(1)
5)
(e)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
4) Tabs
(b)
(2)
1)
90
6)
(c)
(1)
4) Tabs
3) [B]
(d)
2)
(f)
90
7)
4)
(c)
4) Tabs
8)
[B] M1.7x4 (Silver)
(2)
(1)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
Fig. 5-3-10
69
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
(a)
3) [B]
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(9) Disc Cover
1) Remove the space sheet (b) that covers the opening for operating lock arm.
2) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver to move the lock arm (d) in the direction of the arrow to
open the disc cover (a).
3) Disconnect the one flat cable.
4) Open the card slot cover (g).
5) Remove four screws [F].
6) Remove the disc cover in the direction of the arrow: Be careful not to damage the flat cable (h)
that extends from the disc cover.
Procedure and caution for reassembly
1) Reinstall the disc cover so that the hinge 1 of side case-R fits into portion 2 at the inside top of
disc cover, and that the cover is not inclined. Installing and inclined disc cover could damage the
switch inside the disc cover.
2) Pass the flat cable extending from the disc cover through the gap between the frame and side
case-R, and then connect it to the MAN-H/MAN circuit board (f).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Disc cover
Space sheet
Opening for operating lock arm
Lock arm
AEL-H/AEL circuit board
MAN-H/MAN circuit board
Card slot cover
(h) Flat cable
(i) Hinge of side case-R
(j) Frame
(k) Side case-R
(m)Loader
(n) Disc drive unit
1) (b)
(d)
(c)
2)
(c)
(a)
(e)
(i)
2
(f)
1
6)
3)
(h)
(1)
(1)
(a)
(2)
4) (g)
(1) Unloc
(2)Pull
Fig. 5-3-11 Left Side
[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)
Correct
Incorrect
Incorrect
5) [F]
5) [F]
(j)
(n)
(m)
(f)
Installing and inclined disc
cover could damage the switch
in side the disc cover.
(i)
(h)
(a)
(k)
Fig. 5-3-12 Right Side
70
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Disc
cover
Switch
k
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(10) USB Holder, USB-H/USB Circuit Board, Rear Cover, EVF Unit, and Hand Strap
Note:
Before replacing the EVF unit, always perform “(1) BL DET Check” in “6-4-11 EVF”.
USB Holder (a) and USB-H/USB Circuit Board (b)
1) Remove one screw [F].
2) Disconnect the USB-H/USB circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (h).
3) Remove the USB-H/USB circuit board from USB holder in the direction of the arrow.
Rear Cover (c) and EVF Unit (d)
4) Remove the hand strap from side case-R (g).
5) Remove one screw [F] and one screw [A].
6) Disconnect the three flat cables, and then remove the rear cover along with the EVF unit.
7) Remove one screw [A], and then remove the EVF unit.
Hand Strap (e)
8) Remove screw [A], screw [D] and screw [M], and then remove the hand strap.
(d)
5) [F]
(c)
7) [A]
(f)
(e)
6)
8) [M]
6)
8) [D]
8) [A]
4)
5) [A]
(g)
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)
1) [F]
[M] M1.7x3 (Black)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(f)
(g)
(h)
USB holder
USB-H/USB Circuit Board
Rear cover
EVF unit
Hand strap plate
Side case-R
MAN-H/MAN circuit board
(h)
(a)
2) (b)
Fig. 5-3-13
71
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
3)
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
[G] M1.7x3 (Gold)
(11) SHE-H Circuit Board and Accessory
Shoe in VDR-M70
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(b)
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
1) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board (a) from
AEL-H circuit board (c).
2) Disconnect the GYR-H (d) circuit board from
SHE-H circuit board.
3) Remove one screw [G], one screw [H], and
then remove the SHE-H circuit board along
with the accessory shoe (b).
4) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board from
accessory shoe.
2) (d)
3) [H]
4)
3) [G]
SHE-H circuit board
Accessory shoe
AEL-H circuit board
GYR-H circuit board
(c)
1) (a)
Fig. 5-3-14
(12) SHE Circuit Board in VDR-M50
2) (c)
1) Disconnect the SHE circuit board (a) from
AEL circuit board (b).
2) Disconnect the GYR circuit board (c) from
SHE circuit board.
3) Remove one screw [G], and then remove the
SHE-H circuit board.
[G] M1.7x3 (Gold)
3) [G]
(a) SHE circuit board
(b) AEL circuit board
(c) GYR circuit board
1) (a)
(b)
Fig. 5-3-15
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
(13) Accessory Shoe in VDR-M50
1) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the
accessory shoe (a).
(a)
(a) Accessory shoe
1) [H]
Fig. 5-3-16
72
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(14) AEL-H/AEL and MAN-H/MAN Circuit Boards
Note:
Before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, always perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup
and write”.
1) Disconnect the two flat cables.
2) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board (c) from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (b).
3) Remove three screws [G].
4) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board (a) that is assembled with MAN-H/MAN circuit board in
the direction of the arrow: It may be difficult to remove these circuit boards, since the heat sink
rubbers (e) on MAN-H/MAN circuit board may stick to the frame (d).
5) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board in the direction of the
arrow.
Note:
Do not scratch the surface of IC2009 or IC2010: The surfaces of IC2009 or IC2010 are silicon
substrate (silicon wafer) that is semi-conducting. Scratching them could cause fault in operation.
Procedure and caution for reassembly
1) Be sure to paste the two heat sink rubbers (e) on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board: Neglecting to
paste the heat sink rubber could cause a fault.
2) Connect the MAN-H/MAN circuit board and AEL-H/AEL circuit board, and then attach them to
the frame. If the MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL circuit boards are attached to the frame
independently, a connection fault could result.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(d)
2) (c)
AEL-H/AEL circuit board
MAN-H/MAN circuit board
DRF-H/DRF circuit board
Frame
Heat sink rubbers
1)
e
(b)
IC2010
IC2006
IC4106
e
IC2009
IC4002
IC2010
3) [G]
VDR-M70PP
(a)
(2)
(1) Unloc
(2) Pull
(1)
(b)
[G] M1.7x3 (Gold)
5)
3) [G]
4)
Fig. 5-3-17
73
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M50PP
3) [G]
k
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(15) Camera Block
1) Remove two screws [F], and then remove the camera block (a).
Procedure and caution for reassembly
Fit the hook (c) of camera frame onto the square hole (d) in frame before tightening the screws.
Note:
Take great care when handling the camera block: The camera block contains the lens unit, which is
a precision component. Subjecting the lens unit to any impact could result in a fault.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Camera block
Frame
hook of camera frame
square hole in frame
(d)
(c)
(a)
(b)
1) [F]
1) [F]
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
(a)
[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)
1) [F]
1) [F]
Fig. 5-3-18
(16) Link Bracket
1) Remove two screws [H], and then remove
the link bracket (a).
(a) Link bracket
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
(a)
1) [H]
Fig. 5-3-19
74
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(17) Drive Block and Side Case-R
1) Remove five screws [F] and two screws [A], and then remove the drive block (a) from the side
case-R (b).
Note:
Take great care when handling the drive block: The drive block contains the disc drive unit, which
is a precision component. Do not subject the disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a
fault.
1) [F]
(a) Drive block
(b) Side case-R
1) [F]
(b)
1) [F]
1) [F]
1) [A]
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)
[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)
(a)
Fig. 5-3-20 Left side
1) [A]
1) [F]
Fig. 5-3-21 Bottom side
75
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(18) Loader, DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board, Disc Drive Unit, Lock Unit, and Frame
Loader (a)
1) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the loader.
DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board (b) and Disc Drive Unit (c)
2) Remove three screws [K].
3) Disconnect the one flat cable.
4) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board from DRV-R circuit board in disc drive unit.
Lock Unit (d) and Frame (e)
5) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the lock unit.
Note:
The disc drive unit is a precision component: Take great care when handling it. Do not subject the
disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a fault.
Procedure and caution for reassembly
Be sure to paste the heat sink rubber (f) on the frame: Neglecting to paste it could cause a fault.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Loader
DRF-H/DRF circuit board
Disc drive unit
Lock unit
Frame
Heat sink rubber
(a)
(1)
(c)
(2)
2) [K]
1) [J]
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
(1)
4) (b)
3)
2) [K]
5) [H]
(d)
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
(f)
[J] M1.7x3 (Black)
[K] M1.7x1.8 (Gold)
(e)
Fig. 5-3-22
76
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(19) Fulcrum Cover-U, Fulcrum Cover-B
and Fulcrum Unit
1) Remove two screws [P], and then remove the
fulcrum cover-U (a) and fulcrum cover-B (b)
from the fulcrum unit (c).
(a) Fulcrum cover-U
(b) Fulcrum cover-B
(c) Fulcrum unit
(c)
(b)
(a)
1) [P]
[P] M1.6x3 (Black)
Fig. 5-3-23
(20) LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board
(a)
LCD Case-B (a)
1) Remove the LCD case-B in the direction of
the arrow.
LCD Circuit Board (b)
2) Disconnect the one flat cable.
3) Release the two tabs, and then remove the
LCD circuit board.
Be careful not to deform LCD frame (c) at
this time.
(c)
1)
2)
3) Tabs
(b)
(1)
(a) LCD case-B
(b) LCD circuit board
(c) LCD frame
(2)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
(1)
Fig. 5-3-24 LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board
Note:
1) Do not remove the mirror sheet (d), light
guide plate (e), diffusion sheet (f), prism
sheets (g) or LCD panel (h) from the LCD
frame (c).
2) If the mirror sheet, light guide plate,
diffusion sheet, prism sheets or LCD panel
becomes detached from the LCD frame,
assemble them as shown in Fig. 5-3-25.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(c)
(h)
LCD frame
Mirror sheet
Light guide plate
Diffusion sheet
Prism sheets
LCD panel
(f)
Silver
surface
(e)
(g)
(d)
A
B
C
A>B>C
White
surface
Fig. 5-3-25 Assembling parts inside LCD frame
77
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(21) GYR-H Circuit Board, Lens Frame, Lens Unit, Cushion, Crystal Filter, CCD Image
Sensor, and SEN-H Circuit Board in VDR-M70
GYR-H Circuit Board (a)
1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the GYR-H circuit board.
Lens Frame (b)
2) Remove one screw [D].
3) Release the two tabs.
4) Remove the lens frame in the direction of the arrow.
Lens Unit (c), Cushion (d) and Crystal Filter (e)
5) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the lens unit, cushion and crystal filter.
CCD Image Sensor (f) and SEN-H Circuit Board (g)
6) Unsolder the fourteen points of CCD image sensor terminals on SEN-H circuit board.
Note:
1) The lens unit, crystal filter and CCD image sensor are precision components: Take great care
when handling them. Adherence of dust, foreign object, fingerprint, etc. to them, scratches or
impact, could cause a fault.
2) Never use metal tweezers to handle the crystal filter: Doing so could cause a fault.
Procedure and caution for reassembly
1) Take care with the orientation of crystal filter when assembling it: Incorrect orientation of the
crystal filter could cause a fault.
2) When assembling the lens unit into lens frame, insert the flat cable (h) of lens unit inside the lens
frame.
(g)
(f)
6)
(c)
(c)
5) [L]
(h)
(d)
(e)
(h)
(b)
1) [D]
2) [D]
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
a
b
GYR-H circuit board
Lens frame
Lens unit
Cushion
Crystal filter
CCD image sensor
SEN-H circuit board
Flat cable
Color
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
(a)
[L] M1.7x5 (Silver)
4)
(b)
3) Tabs
Fig. 5-3-26
78
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Transparent
a>b
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(22) GYR Circuit Board, Lens Frame, and
Lens Unit in VDR-M50
Information:
The VDR-M50 lens unit is set as a service
component: It includes the parts equivalent to
cushion rubber, crystal filter, CCD image
sensor and SEN-H circuit board of VDRM70.
(a) GYR circuit board
(b) Lens frame
(c) Lens unit
1) [D]
(b)
(a)
GYR Circuit Board (a)
1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the
GYR circuit board.
Lens Frame (b) and Lens Unit (c)
2) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the
lens frame.
2) [D]
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
(c)
Fig. 5-3-27
Caution:
1) The lens unit is a precision component: Take
great care when handling it. Do not allow
any dust to adhere to it, and do not subject it
to damage or impact: Doing so could cause a
fault.
2) Do not disassemble the lens unit: Doing so
could cause a fault.
79
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6 ADJUSTMENT
6.1.
CREATING REFERENCE DATA
The reference data is necessary for adjustment: The adjustment program will not operate normally
without it. Before adjustment, be sure to create the reference data, using the same model (with
normal camera block) as the one to be adjusted.
See section 6-1-1 and subsequent sections for details.
Information:
1) The reference data is used to reduce the difference between environments of servicing site and
factory (color temperature of light box, etc.). Using the reference data will increase adjustment
accuracy.
2) The reference data is usually created once for each model because it is recorded on hard disk
drive (HDD) of PC with the adjustment program. However, creating reference data again is
necessary in the following cases:
a) When performing adjustment using a light box that is different from that used when the
reference data was created.
b) When performing maintenance of the light box used when creating the reference data
(replacing light, etc.).
c) When performing adjustment using a C12 light balancing filter that is different from that used
when the reference data was created.
d) When deleting the folder containing the adjustment program from HDD.
80
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.1.1.
List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data
NEW
Note:Create the data using the adjustment data
downloaded from Intranet.
Skylark connection jig
VKF1872
Personal computer (PC)
All of the following OS must operate normally on it.*1
OS: Windows 95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP/NT4.0
C12 light balancing filter
VKF1164LBB12
DSP-R jig
VKF1873
Step-up rings (Diameter 37 mm)
VKF1164TAR37
RS-232C cable (9-pin or 25-pin straight type)
[Generally available]
AV/S input/output or output cable
[Accessory: EW12522]
AC adapter/charger
[Accessory] *2
Power cable for AC adapter/charger
[Accessory] *2
Example
DC power cord
[Accessory: Parts No. EV11012]
*1: The adjustment program used on DVD video
camera/recorder is exclusively for Windows
95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000
Professional/XP/NT4.0: The program cannot
be run on MS-DOS.
*2: The part numbers of AC adapter/charger and
power cable are different depending on the
destination: Refer to the “Replacement Parts
List” for the part numbers.
81
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.1.2.
Power Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data
1) DVD video camera/recorder that is the same model as the one to be adjusted and whose camera
block is operating normally.
Note:
It is recommended that you use a brand-new unit of the same model when creating the reference
data. If such a unit is not available, use the same model of the DVD video camera/recorder that is
received from customer for repairing fault in disc drive that is other than in the camera block,
and one where there is no problem in recording of camera image and the zoom is operating
normally.
2) 3100 K light box (VFK1164TDVLB)
3) Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks)
4) DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A)
5) DC power supply for Light box (12 V/2 A)
6.1.3.
Connections when Creating Reference Data
Connect the DVD video camera/recorder (for creating reference data), jigs and test equipment as
shown in Fig. 6-1-1.
Prohibition:
Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and create reference data with only the
adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-1-1).
Do not attempt to create reference data with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled: Doing
so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage circuits and
a laser emitter block.
82
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/
M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could cause
a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.
HP LIGHT BOX
COLOR
MONITOR
COLLIMAROR
FRONT
SECTION
To
VIDEO IN
YEL
CAMERA STAND
ADJUSTMENT
COVER
AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT
CABLE
DC Power
CORD
To AC OUTLET
TRIPOD
DC POWER
SUPPLY
(12V/2A)
RED
SKYLARK
CONNECTION
JIG
BLK
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
(5V/1A)
RED
GND
(PIN 16) BLK
POWER CABLE
VFK0631
BLK
PC
RS-232C
CABLE
YEL
DSP-R JIG
SD
RD
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)
WHT
Fig. 6-1-1 Connections when Creating Reference Data
83
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.1.4.
Setting when Creating Reference Data
When the connections for creating reference data are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder
and test equipment as follows:
1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD
video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen.
3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed.
7) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display.
Information:
The following table shows the menu status after the above settings:
The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning
when creating reference data.
Item
Setting
Item
LCD Setup
Camera Functions Setup
Program AE
White Balance
EIS
Dig. Zoom
Wind Cut
Cinema
Auto
Auto
On
×40
Off
Off
Recording Functions Setup
VIDEO Mode
Quality
Input Source (*1)
PHOTO Input
Self Timer
OSD Output
FINE
FINE
CAMERA
Field
Off
Off
Brightness
Color Level
+
+
Initial Setup
Beep
Power Save
Record LED
Language
On
Off
On
English
*1: Display only on models that have the line input
function.
84
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Setting
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.1.5.
Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program
Information:
The adjustment program also includes a program for creating reference data.
(1) Copy
1) Start the PC.
2) Start Explorer and create a new folder in HDD of PC. The name “map04w” is recommended for
the folder: If a folder with the same name exists, give the folder a similar name that is easily
understandable.
Note:
Be sure to manage the adjustment programs for Windows and MS-DOS in different folders:
Managing them in the same folder will interfere with adjustment.
3) Download the software for adjustment from web site to the map04w folder.
(2) Deleting
If it is necessary to delete the adjustment program from hard disk drive (HDD) of PC, delete the
map04w folder that was created during storage.
6.1.6.
Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation Program
Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set
to “VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on: The reference data creation
program will not start unless the connections for creating reference data are correct, and the DVD
video camera/recorder or DSP-R jig is powered.
For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.
Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.
(1) Start
1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate all other applications.
2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “SETUPforMAP2004W.EXE” file in map04w folder to start
the program.
3) Once the program has started, the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will appear.
85
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
4) Choose the communication port to which the RS-232C
cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of
corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen.
5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL
SELECT screen.
COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING
screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM
for SERVICE STATION
COM PORT SETTING
PORT
Note:
If the following dialogs appear, perform the
troubleshooting below:
4
5
PORT 1
PORT 4
PORT 2
PORT 5
PORT 3
PORT 6
OK
EXIT
POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR dialog
ERROR
!
MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER.
POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR!
Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003
OK
COM PORT ERROR dialog
ERROR
!
COM PORT ERROR
OK
When the power or connection error dialog appears:
A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on.
Make sure that all connections are correct and that
power is supplied to the reference data creating
device or DSP-R interface jig.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
After solving the problem, restart the program.
When the communication port error dialog appears:
There was a mistake in selecting communication port.
Check the communication port.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
Select the communication port again after restart.
86
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in
MODEL SELECT screen.
7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen,
and then proceed with the SETUP MENU screen.
Refer to next item for subsequent operations.
If there is an error in model selection, the FILE
HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK
button, and then choose the correct model.
MODEL SELECT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL SELECT
××××
××××
××××
Note:
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the
correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the
newest adjustment program, and then start over again.
××××
6
7
EXIT
ENTER
CONNECTION
(2) Termination
SETUP MENU screen.
1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of
program to return to the MODEL SELECT screen.
2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SETUP MENU
Matrix
Information:
If the PC does not accept any operation during work,
or the reference data creating program does not work,
perform the following procedure:
1) Set the power switch of reference data creating
device to “OFF”.
2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig.
3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys
on PC keyboard to restart the PC.
4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of
reference data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn
on the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig again.
5) Restart the reference data creating program.
87
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
White Balance
White Balance Abs
EXECUTE
RETURN
FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog
ERROR
!
File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE]
OK
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.1.7.
Creating Reference Data
Start the setup program referring to “6-1-6 Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation
Program”. For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.
Information:
It takes approx. 20 minutes to create reference data.
The following shows the times required for each item:
Matrix: Approx. 10 minutes
White Balance: Approx. 10 minutes
White Balance Abs: Approx. 30 seconds
SETUP MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SETUP MENU
1
Matrix
White Balance
White Balance Abs
Preparation:
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen.
2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter:
Attach it during setup.
Procedure:
1) Choose MATRIX on the SETUP MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on SETUP MENU screen to
start setup.
3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during
setup. Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens
of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog.
4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during
setup.
Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog.
After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and
REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear:
Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it
each time.
5) When setup is complete, the SETUP FINISHED dialog
will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the SETUP MENU screen.
When setup is complete with the C12 light balancing
filter attached, remove the C12 light balancing filter.
6) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the SETUP MENU
screen.
7) Repeat steps 2)-5).
88
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
ATTACH THE FILTER dialog
CHECK
!
Attach The Filter.
3
OK
REMOVE THE FILTER dialog
CHECK
!
Remove The Filter.
4
OK
SETUP FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
SETUP FINISHED.
5
OK
SETUP MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SETUP MENU
Matrix
White Balance
6
White Balance Abs
7
EXECUTE
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8) Choose WHITE BALANCE ABS on the SETUP MENU
screen.
9) Repeat steps 2)-5).
10) Click the RETURN button on SETUP MENU screen.
11) The ALL SETUP FINISH dialog will appear: Click the
OK button to complete the creation of reference data.
Note:
Neither Matrix, White Balance nor White Balance Abs in
SETUP MENU can be executed independently. Be sure to
execute all items at the same time.
If you click the RETURN button on the SETUP MENU
screen with an unfinished item, the EXECUTE OTHER
ITEMS dialog will appear. Click the OK button in
EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog, and then execute the
unfinished items.
EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog
CONTINUE
EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS.
OK
89
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
SETUP MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SETUP MENU
Matrix
White Balance
9
White Balance Abs
8
EXECUTE
RETURN
ALL SETUP FINISH dialog
FINISHED
ALL SETUP FINISHED.
OK
11
10
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.2.
6.2.1.
SETUPS FOR ADJUSTMENT
Checking Reference Data
Before starting adjustment, check whether it will be necessary to create the reference data or not,
referring to the flowchart below:
Have you ever performed
adjustment of this model?
No
Yes
Will you use the
same PC as for past
adjustment?
No
Does the “map04w” folder
exist on HDD of PC with
which you previously
performed adjustment?
No
Create the reference data
referring to section 6-1.
Yes
Yes
Copy the “map04w” folder
from the PC with which you
performed adjustment.
Will you use the same
light box as for past
adjustment?
No
Yes
Did you perform
maintenance on the light
box after the last
adjustment?
Yes
No
Will you use the same
C12 light balancing
filteras for past
adjustment?
No
Create the reference data
referring to section 6-1.
Yes
It is not necessary to create
the reference data.
Fig. 6-2-1
6.2.2.
List of Jigs and Tools for Adjustment
This list is the same as when creating reference data: Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools when
Creating Reference Data”.
90
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.2.3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Test Equipment, Power Supply and Charts for Adjstment
Color bar chart (VFK1164TDVCB)
3100 K light box (VFK1164TDVLB)
Hunting chart
Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks)
Oscilloscope
Vectorscope
Digital voltmeter
Frequency counter
DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A)
10) DC power supply for Light box (12 V/2 A)
6.2.4.
Connections for Adjustment
Connect the DVD video camera/recorder, jigs and test equipment as shown in the Fig. 6-2-4.
Prohibition:
Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and perform adjustment with only the
adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-2-4).
Do not attempt to perform any adjustment with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled:
Doing so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage
circuits and a laser emitter block.
(1) Setting and disassembly of DVD video camera/recorder
1) Refer to “(1) Adjustment cover” in “5-3 Disassembly” for how to remove the adjustment cover.
2) Be sure to connect the video output of DVD video camera/recorder to the video input jack of color
monitor, which is usually terminated by 75 ohm: If the video output is not terminated by 75
ohm, the video output value cannot be measured correctly.
91
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/
M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could cause
a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.
OSCILLOSCOPE
COLOR
MONITOR
HP LIGHT BOX
Nothing VECTOR
SCOPE
CH1 CH2
TEL
COLLIMAROR
To
VIDEO IN
VECTOR SCOPE
FRONT
SECTION
To OUTPUT
CAMERA STAND
To INPUT YEL
ADJUSTMENT
COVER
AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT
CABLE
DC POWER
SUPPLY
(12V/2A)
DC POWER
CORD
BLK
RED
TRIPOD
SKYLARK
CONNECTION
JIG
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
POWER CABLE
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
(5V/1A)
RED
LCD-HDD
(PIN 9)
GND
(PIN 16) BLK
To AC OUTLET
VFK0631
BLK
PC
RS-232C
CABLE
YEL
DSP-R JIG
SD
RD
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)
WHT
Fig. 6-2-4 Connections for Adjustment
92
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.2.5.
Settings for Adjustment
When the connections for adjustment are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder and test
equipment as follows:
(1) Setting the DVD video camera/recorder
Information:
This item is the same as when creating reference data.
1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD
video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen.
3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be
executed.
7) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display.
Information:
The following table shows the menu status after the above settings:
The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning
when creating reference data.
Item
Setting
Item
LCD Setup
Camera Functions Setup
Program AE
White Balance
EIS
Dig. Zoom
Wind Cut
Cinema
Auto
Auto
On
×40
Off
Off
Recording Functions Setup
VIDEO Mode
Quality
Input Source
PHOTO Input
Self Timer
OSD Output
Brightness
Color Level
+
+
Initial Setup
Beep
Power Save
Record LED
Language
FINE
FINE
CAMERA
Field
Off
Off
93
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Setting
On
Off
On
English
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(2) Setting test equipment
The names of switches, etc. of test equipment may vary depending on the manufacturer and model.
Some switches in addition to those shown below may have to be set: See the instruction manual of
test equipment for details.
1) Oscilloscope
a) Probe:
10:1
b) TIME/DIV:
10 or 20 µs (except where some other designation is given)
c) VOLTS/DIV:
Change depending on the measurement object
d) TRIGGER SOURCE: CH1 (except where some other designation is given)
e) AC/DC/GND:
AC
2) Vectorscope
a) SATURATION:
75%
94
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.2.6.
Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program
Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set to
“VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on. The adjustment program will not
start unless the connections for adjustment are correct, and the DVD video camera/recorder or DSPR jig is powered.
Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.
(1) Start
1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate
all other applications.
2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “MAP2004W.EXE”
file in map04w folder to start the adjustment program.
3) Once the adjustment program has started, the
COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will
appear.
4) Check the communication port to which the RS-232C
cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of
corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen.
5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL
SELECT screen.
Note:
If the dialogs on right appear, perform the following
troubleshooting:
COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING
screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM
for SERVICE STATION
COM PORT SETTING
PORT
4
5
When the communication port error dialog appears:
There was a mistake in selecting communication port.
Check the communication port.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
Select the communication port again after restart.
95
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
PORT 4
PORT 2
PORT 5
PORT 3
PORT 6
EXIT
OK
Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003
POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR
dialog
ERROR
!
When the power or connection error dialog appears:
A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on.
Make sure that all connections are correct and that
power is supplied to the reference data creating
device or DSP-R interface jig.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
After solving the problem, restart the program.
PORT 1
MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER.
POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR!
OK
COM PORT ERROR dialog
ERROR
!
COM PORT ERROR
OK
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Information:
When communications between the PC and DVD video
camera/recorder are normal during adjustment, the word
“CONNECTION” in status bar (bottom left) of each screen
will flash.
6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in
MODEL SELECT screen.
7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen,
and then proceed with the ADJUST MENU screen.
Start of the adjustment program is now complete. Refer
to “6-3 Adjustment Procedure” for subsequent
operations.
If there is an error in model selection, the FILE
HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK
button, and then choose the correct model.
MODEL SELECT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL SELECT
××××
××××
××××
××××
6
7
ENTER
EXIT
CONNECTION
ADJUST MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
Note:
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the
correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the
newest adjustment program, and then start over again.
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
(2) Termination
SPOT NOISE
LCD
1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of
adjustment program to return to the MODEL SELECT
screen.
2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen.
EVF
EXECUTE
CONNECTION
Information:
If the PC does not accept any operation during work, or
the reference data creating program does not work,
perform the following procedure:
1) Set the power switch of reference data creating device
to “OFF”.
2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig.
3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys on
PC keyboard to restart the PC.
4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of reference
data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn on the DC
power supply of DSP-R interface jig again.
5) Restart the reference data creating program.
96
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog
ERROR
!
File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE]
OK
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.3.
6.3.1.
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
Adjustment Program Hierarchy Diagram
Communication Port Setting
Data Initialize
Model Select
FILE MENU
Initial Data Write
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ×
×××
ADJUST MENU
Backup Data Write
Initial Data Write
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
Original Data Backup
AUTO FUCUS
Refer to "4-9-2 EEPROM data
backup and write".
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
EXECUTE
RETURN
SPOT NOISE
Backup Data Write
LCD
CONNECTION
EVF
VIDEO LEVEL
EXECUTE
Original Data Backup
RETURN
CONNECTION
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FOCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD PLL
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD CONTRAST-1
PLL
CONTRAST
LCD BRIGHT
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
LCD CONTRAST-2
EXECUTE
RETURN
LCD WHITE BALANCE
CONNECTION
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF BL Check
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF PLL
PLL
CONTRAST
EVF CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
EVF BRIGHT
EXECUTE
RETURN
EVF WHTIE BALANCE
CONNECTION
Fig. 6-3-1
97
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.3.2.
List of Adjustment Needed After Replacing Major Components
Major Components
MAN-H/MAN circuit board
MAN-H/MAN circuit board(*1)
(EEPROM backup data already
(EEPROM data backup
written)
disabled)(*2)
(*1)
Item
EVF
unit(*3)
LCD
unit
Initial Data Write
Video Level
Burst Level
Sampling Pulse
Autofocus
Auto Iris Control
Matrix
Chroma Gain
Spot Noise
LCD PLL
LCD Contrast-1(*4)
LCD Bright(*4)
LCD Contrast-2(*4)
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check
EVF PLL
EVF Contrast
EVF Bright
EVF White Balance
*1: Be sure to perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit
board.
*2: “EEPROM data backup disabled” refers to when the backup of EEPROM data from the MAN-H/MAN
circuit board to be replaced could not be properly executed due to some fault, such as VDR-M70/M50
not being turned on, etc.
*3: When replacing the EVF unit, be sure to perform EVF backlight check between the replaced and new
EVF units.
*4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set
with the three items, and in the order stated:
LCD contrast – 1
LCD bright
LCD contrast – 2
98
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Item
Lens unit
[For VDRM70]
Lens unit
[For VDRM50]
Major Components
IC1001
IC1301 IC3701 IC6103
[For VDR- IC1302
M70]
Initial Data Write
Video Level
Burst Level
Sampling Pulse
Autofocus
Auto Iris Control
Matrix
Chroma Gain
Spot Noise
LCD PLL
LCD Contrast-1(*4)
LCD Bright(*4)
LCD Contrast-2(*4)
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check
EVF PLL
EVF Contrast
EVF Bright
EVF White Balance
*4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set with
the three items, and in the order stated:
LCD contrast – 1
LCD bright
LCD contrast – 2
99
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.3.3.
Purpose od Adjustments and Incompleted Phenomenon
Item
Initial Data Write
Video Level
Burst Level
Sampling Pulse
Autofocus
Auto Iris Control
Matrix
Chroma Gain
Spot Noise
LCD PLL
LCD Contrast-1
LCD Bright
LCD Contrast-2
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check
EVF PLL
EVF Contrast
EVF Bright
EVF White Balance
Purpose
Incompleted Phenomenon
To write initial data to EEPROM in
which adjustment data has been stored
To set the video output level.
To set the burst level.
To measure the delay time in sampling
IC, and optimize pulse timing.
To set out-of-focus correction level
during zoom.
To set iris control data.
To compensate for unevenness in the
chroma signal and input auto white
balance control data.
To set color saturation for the
reference color temperature.
To correct spot noise.
To synchronize LCD image.
To set the bright level and contrast of
the LCD monitor.
To check the characteristics of EVF
backlight.
To synchronize EVF image
To set the bright level and contrast of
the viewfinder.
100
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
-----------The picture becomes dark or whitish.
Diagonal beats and horizontal noise occur.
Focus is lost during zooming.
It takes time until a subject is brought into
focus, or correct focus is not obtained.
The picture becomes too bright or dark.
Color reproduction becomes defective.
Color of the picture is denser or lighter
than that of the subject.
Spot noise occurs.
Synchronization of LCD image is distorted.
Color reproduction becomes defective of the
LCD monitor.
-----------Synchronization of EVF image is distorted.
Color reproduction becomes defective of the
viewfinder.
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Start the adjustment program referring to “6-2-6 Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program”.
For the subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.
Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.
6.4.1.
Initial Data Write
ADJUST MENU screen
Note:
1) Write the initial data only after the MAN-H/MAN circuit
board has been replaced when the backup of EEPROM
data could not be performed using the MAN-H/MAN
circuit board before replacement.
Refer to “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” for
backup of EEPROM data.
2) Writing the initial data will initialize all the adjustment
data in EEPROM. After writing, be sure to perform all
the appropriate adjustments.
Procedure:
1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
3) Choose Initial Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen.
4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to start writing of initial data.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
5) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
6) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen,
and then be sure to perform all the adjustment items.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
1
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen
Data Initialize
FILE MENU
3
Initial Data Write
Backup Data Write
Original Data Backup
6
4
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
DATA INITIALIZE
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
FINISHED WRITING DATA
OK
101
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.2.
Video Level
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”.
Procedure:
1) Choose VIDEO LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level of waveform
is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second
intervals while checking any increase or decrease in
level of waveform.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the
adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
1
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
1.0V
± 0.05Vp-p
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
Fig. 6-4-1
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
102
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.3.
Burst Level
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”.
Procedure:
1) Choose BURST LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that burst level of the
waveform is 300mV ± 15 mVp-p. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in burst level.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the
adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
1
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
300mV
± 15mVp-p
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
Fig. 6-4-2
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
103
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.4.
Sampling Pulse
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Note:
Start this adjustment after the circuit operation is
stabilized, e.g., after leaving the DVD video camera/
recorder for at least one hour at normal temperature, and
then starting within 90 seconds after turning it on.
Unstable circuit operation will cause improper adjustment.
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
1
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
Preparation:
Cap the lens of DVD video camera/recorder.
Procedure:
1) Choose SAMPLING PULSE on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to start adjustment.
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
104
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
3
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.5.
Autofocus
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Set the Hunting chart
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
2) Set the zoom to telephoto end, and make sure that the
center of Hunting chart appears.
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
1
AUTO FUCUS
Procedure:
1) Choose AUTO FOCUS on the adjustment menu screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to start adjustment.
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
If the AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click
the OK button in dialog, and then execute readjustment:
If the AF adjustment error dialog still appears even after
troubleshooting, the connection of lens unit may be
incorrect or the unit may be faulty.
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
3
AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog
ERROR
Lens Adjustment Error
OK
105
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.6.
Auto Iris Control
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparation:
Set zoom to wide-angle end, and point at light box without
collimator and chart, filling the screen.
Set the light box in front of camera.
Procedure:
1) Choose AUTO IRIS CONTROL on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to start adjustment.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
If the IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click
the OK button in dialog, perform the appropriate
corrective action, and then perform readjustment. If the
IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog still appears after
the corrective action, the lens unit may be faulty:
a) Perform adjustment in a place where no
surrounding light will affect the adjustment.
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
RETURN
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
3
IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog
Iris Adjustment Error
OK
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
EXECUTE
CONNECTION
ERROR
106
1
MATRIX
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.7.
Matrix
ADJUST MENU screen
Preparation:
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen.
2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter:
Attach it during adjustment.
Procedure:
1) Choose MATRIX on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to start adjustment.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during
setup.
Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens of
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog.
4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during
setup.
Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog.
After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and
REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear:
Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it
each time.
5) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
1
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
CONNECTION
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
MATRIX
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
ATTACH THE FILTER dialog
CHECK
!
Attach The Filter.
3
OK
REMOVE THE FILTER dialog
CHECK
!
Remove The Filter.
4
OK
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
107
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
RETURN
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.8.
Chroma Gain
Preparation:
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen.
2) Prepare the color bar chart: Use it during adjustment.
Procedure:
1) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder, and use the joystick to specify “White
Bal.: Set” to display the white balance screen. (See Fig. 6-4-4)
2) Press the center button on joystick: The “ ” mark on the white balance setting screen will blink.
Hold down the button until the “ ” mark changes to a steady light.
3) Press the STOP button on DVD video camera/recorder.
4) Insert the color bar chart into light box and point the DVD video camera/recorder at the chart so
that it fills the screen.
Set
EXIT
Fig. 6-4-4 White balance set screen
5) Choose CHROMA GAIN on the ADJUST MENU screen.
6) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT
screen.
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
5
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
6
CONNECTION
108
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
EXECUTE
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
7) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in ROUGH
ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red
level approaches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking the increase or
decrease of vector or level.
8) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in FINE
ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red
level matches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in vector or level.
9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the
adjustment was performed.
10) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
11) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder,
and use the joystick to specify (return to) “White Bal.:
Auto”.
Table 6-4-1 Value of Red Level/Vector
Model
When using a vectorscope
VDR-M70
VDR-M50
A = 260 % ± 5 %
A = 260 % ± 5 %
RED
BURST
270%
± 5%
100%
Fig. 6-4-5 When using a vectorscope
109
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT
FINE ADJUSTMENT
ROUGH ADJUSTMENT
GAIN UP
GAIN UP
GAIN DOWN
GAIN DOWN
8
7
9
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
10
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.9.
Spot Noise
p
Information:
1) The SPOT NOISE adjustment compensates for bright points that appear on the screen, and these
are caused by a defect in pixel of CCD (image sensor) that may occur when DVD video camera/
recorder is used under particular conditions or for a long time. Therefore, execute SPOT NOISE
only in the following cases:
a) Pixel defect occurs in CCD and a bright point appears on screen,
b) Lens unit (CCD) is replaced
c) “Data Initialize” is executed
2) The presence or absence of a bright point that appears on screen due to pixel defect on CCD can
easily be judged by capping the lens. Use a CRT color monitor for this check.
Procedure:
1) Choose SPOT NOISE on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to start adjustment.
When SPOT NOISE starts, the DVD video camera/
recorder will automatically turn on again.
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
If bright point still appears after adjustment is finished,
the lens unit (CCD) may be faulty.
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
1
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
110
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
3
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.10. LCD
Note:
1) Perform LCD only after replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, LCD circuit board or LCD unit,
or executing “Initial Data Write”.
2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for LCD adjustment.
Before performing any adjustments for LCD, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the
test mode using the procedure below, and then display the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU.
Procedure:
1) Choose LCD on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the
test mode, the LCD screen will be black and white (see
Fig. 6-4-7), and the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
will appear on the PC monitor screen.
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
1
LCD
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
LCD ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
Fig. 6-4-7 LCD Monitor Screen
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
EXECUTE
CONNECTION
111
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(1) LCD PLL
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparation:
Connect the frequency counter to “LCD-HDD (pin 9)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
Procedure:
1) Choose PLL on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT
screen.
Synchronization of the video on LCD monitor screen will
be off at this time, and the image will flow.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the frequency is
15.625 kHz ± 0.1 kHz. Click the button at approx. 2second intervals while checking the variation of
frequencies.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
1
PLL
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
PLL ADJUSTMENT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
PLL ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
112
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(2) LCD Contrast-1
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Note:
Be sure to adjust LCD brightness and LCD contrast-2
after completing LCD contrast-1 adjustment.
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is.
Procedure
1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level
A of waveform is 1.75V ± 0.05Vp-p. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in level A.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
1
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
A = 1.75V ± 0.05Vp-p
Fig. 6-4-8 Waveform of LCD Contrast-1 Adjustment
113
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(3) LCD Brightness
Note:
1) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 before performing LCD
brightness adjustment.
2) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-2 after completing LCD
brightness adjustment.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
CONTRAST
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is.
Procedure:
1) Choose BRIGHT on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT
ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level
B of waveform is 2.6V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in level B.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
B
[After Adjustment]
B = 2.6V ± 0.1Vp-p
Fig. 6-4-9 Waveform of LCD Bright Adjustment
114
RETURN
CONNECTION
FINISHED
[Before Adjustment]
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
1
BRIGHT
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(4) LCD Contrast-2
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Caution:
Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 and LCD brightness
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
before performing LCD contrast-2 adjustment.
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is.
Procedure
1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level
A of waveform is 2.00V ± 0.05Vp-p. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in level A.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
1
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
A = 2.00V ± 0.05Vp-p
Fig. 6-4-10 Waveform of LCD Contrast-2 Adjustment
115
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(5) LCD White Balance
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-R (pin 3)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
PLL
CONTRAST
3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output.
4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and
BRIGHT
TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”.
5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the
WHITE BALANCE
CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-411.
2
EXECUTE
1
RETURN
Procedure
1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1
waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the
button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any
CONNECTION
SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
increase or decrease in level a.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED
ADJUSTMENT screen.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
and d of the waveform.
6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen.
c
DOWN
UP
3
4
NEXT
RETURN
CONNECTION
SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT
a
DOWN
UP
5
d
b
6
Fig. 6-4-11 Waveform of LCD White Balance Adjustment
116
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
CONNECTION
NEXT
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-B (pin 7)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a
and b of the waveform. (See Fig. 6-4-11)
9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE
ADJUSTMENT screen.
10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
and d of the waveform.
11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
12) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
13) Click the RETURN button in LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
8
9
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
10
11
NEXT
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
117
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
12
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
6.4.11. EVF
Note:
1) Perform EVF only after replacing IC3701 and its peripheral components, MAN-H/MAN circuit
board or EVF unit, or executing “Initial Data Write”.
2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for EVF adjustment.
Before performing any adjustments for EVF, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the
test mode using the procedure below, and then display the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU.
Procedure:
1) Choose EVF on the ADJUST MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode.
The progress status can be confirmed using the
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the
test mode, the viewfinder screen will be black and white
(see Fig. 6-4-12), and the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
will appear on the PC monitor screen.
ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
MODEL NAME: ××××
ADJUST MENU
DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
1
EVF
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
EVF ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE
PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
Fig. 6-4-12 EVF Screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
EXECUTE
CONNECTION
118
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(1) EVF BL DET Check
Note:
Be sure to take note of the resulting value of this check because the check value will be needed
when EVF adjustment is completed.
There are two types of EVF unit mounted in these VDR-M70/M50:
The backlight characteristics of the two types are different.
This check item identifies the type of EVF unit mounted (replaced).
Procedure:
1) Connect the digital voltmeter to “BL-DET (pin 12)” of Skylark Connection jig.
2) Check whether the reading on digital voltmeter is 5 V or 0 V., and take note of the value.
(2) EVF PLL
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
Preparations:
1) Connect oscilloscope CH-1 to EVF-RPD (pin 8) of the
Skylark connection jig.
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”
Procedure:
1) Choose “PLL” on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT
screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button to flatten the waveform:
Click the button at intervals of approx. 2 seconds while
observing the movement of waveform.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
1
PLL
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
PLL ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
PLL ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
Fig. 6-4-13 Waveform of EVF PLL Adjustment
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
119
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(3) EVF Contrast
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
Preparations:
1) Confirm the CH1 connection to video out.
2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRIGGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is.
Procedure:
1) Choose CONTRAST on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level A of the
waveform is 2.2V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx.
2-second intervals while checking any increase or
decrease in level A.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
1
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
A = 2.2V ± 0.1Vp-p
OK
Fig. 6-4-14 Waveform of EVF Contrast Adjustment
120
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(4) EVF Brightness
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video output.
2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2” and
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”.
Procedure:
1) Choose BRIGHT on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT
ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level B of the
waveform is 3.7V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx.
2-second intervals while checking any increase or
decrease in level B.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
CONTRAST
1
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
RETURN
CONNECTION
BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
B = 3.7V ± 0.1Vp-p
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
Fig. 6-4-15 Waveform of EVF Bright Adjustment
121
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
(5) EVF White Balance
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-R (pin 2)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output.
4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and
TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”.
5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the
CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-416.
Procedure:
1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1
waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the
button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking
increase or decrease level a.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED
ADJUSTMENT screen.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
and d of the waveform.
6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen.
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
PLL
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WHITE BALANCE
2
EXECUTE
1
RETURN
CONNECTION
SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
3
4
NEXT
RETURN
CONNECTION
SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT
DOWN
UP
5
6
CONNECTION
122
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
NEXT
RETURN
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-B (pin 6)” of
Skylark Connection jig.
8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a
and b of the waveform.
SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE
ADJUSTMENT screen.
10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
DOWN
UP
and d of the waveform.
11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button and then proceed with the BL DET screen.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
12) Click either button on the BL DET screen according to
the voltage checked in “(1) EVF BL DET Check”: “High”
button when the check value is 5 V, or “Low” button
when it is 0 V.
13) When BL DET is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
8
9
SAVE
RETURN
CONNECTION
SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
14) Click the RETURN button in EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
DOWN
UP
10
c
11
NEXT
RETURN
CONNECTION
a
BL DET screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
BL DET
Low
High
d
12
b
CONNECTION
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
OK
Fig. 6-4-16 Waveform of White Balance Adjustment
123
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
13
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
124
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
7 SCHEMATIC, CIRCUIT BOARD AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S Schematic & Wiring Diagrams
S-1 VDR-M70 Wiring Diagram
F
CN0152
To
ACCESSORY SHOE
6PIN
MICROPHONE
F
6PIN
PG1401
FRT-H
PG1802
GYR-H
PG1801
10PIN
CN3401
PG0154
E
LENS
UNIT
6PIN
SHE-H
MR
PG0153
40PIN
22PIN
23PIN
PG3403
25PIN
PG3401
PG3402
22PIN
EVF
UNIT
PG1301
CN8012
CN7004
PG7003
PG7009
24PIN
6PIN
PG7008
LCD
D
E
PG0151
25PIN
SAF-H
6PIN
AEL-H
PG7002
FOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD
PANEL
D
PG7004
PG8012
PG8011
PG7001
DISC DRIVE UNIT
LOCK
UNIT
11PIN
SWL2
SEN-H
SIDE CASE-L
120PIN
(OPERATION SWITCH)
16PIN
C
C
PG1002
PG9404
51PIN
70PIN
HDM
6PIN
PG2001
PG9702
SLID
MOTOR
PG2301
PG1501
4PIN
PG9403
PG2002
DRF-H
B
SPINDLE
MOTOR
DRV-R
15PIN
PG9701
MAN-H
PG2302
PG9404
12PIN
PG0501
PG5001
BATTERY
TERMINAL
B
PG1503
PG9103
J6002
MOD
8PIN
PG1502
51PIN
70PIN
EXTERNAL
MICROPHONE
JACK
REAR COVER
ZOOM/DISC EJECT/
REC BUTTON
J6001
6PIN
PG9301
PG9401
CN8101
M70EB/EG : AV OUTPUT JACK
A
DISC COVER
M70GC : AV INPUT/OUTPUT JACK
20PIN
JK8101
PC CONNECTION
TERMINAL
CARD INSERTION BLOCK/
POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER
USB-H
VDR-M70EB/EG/GC WIRING DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
125
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
A
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S-2 VDR-M50 Wiring Diagram
MICROPHONE
6PIN
F
PG0153
F
PG0154
6PIN
22PIN
FRT
PG1802
22PIN
EVF
UNIT
SHE
PG1401
PG1801
GYR
10PIN
CN3401
LENS
UNIT
PG0151
6PIN
E
E
MR
22PIN
PG3403
40PIN
PG1302
25PIN
PG3402
CN8012
CN7004
PG7003
PG3401
PG7009
24PIN
6PIN
PG7008
LCD
25PIN
AEL
SAF
6PIN
PG7004
D
D
PG7002
FOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD
PANEL
PG8012
PG8011
PG7001
DISC DRIVE UNIT
11PIN
SWL2
LOCK
UNIT
16PIN
SIDE CASE-L
(OPERATION SWITCH)
120PIN
PG9404
C
51PIN
C
70PIN
HDM
6PIN
PG2001
PG9702
SLID
MOTOR
PG2301
4PIN
PG9403
PG2002
DRV-R
SPINDLE
MOTOR
PG1501
15PIN
DRF
PG9701
MAN
PG2302
B
12PIN
PG0501
BATTERY
TERMINAL
B
PG9404
PG5001
PG1503
PG9103
J6002
MOD
8PIN
PG1502
51PIN
70PIN
EXTERNAL
MICROPHONE
JACK
REAR COVER
ZOOM/DISC EJECT/
REC BUTTON
J6001
6PIN
PG9301
PG9401
CN8101
M50EB/EG : AV OUTPUT JACK
M50GC : AV INPUT/OUTPUT JACK
20PIN
JK8101
PC CONNECTION
TERMINAL
DISC COVER
CARD INSERTION BLOCK/
POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER
A
USB
A
VDR-M50EB/EG/GC WIRING DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
126
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1F
1
2
2F
3F
3
4
4F
S-3 GYR-H/GYR
5F
5
6
6F
7F
7
8
8F
S-4 FRT-H/FRT
F
F
Model names "M70" and "M50" in the diagram include
EG, EB and GC.
1E
2E
3E
1.3
1.3
0
3.1
4E
5E
6E
7E
8E
E
E
To
MICROPHONE
1D
1.3
2D
1.3
0
3.1
3D
4D
5D
D
To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7003
6D
7D
8D
D
V_GYRO
H_GYRO
2C
3C
4C
REC INDI.
1C
M70:To SHE-H PG0154
M50:To SHE PG0154
REMOTE
CONT.
RECEIVER
5C
6C
7C
-
8C0
3.0
0
0
3.1
0
C
(64)
3.1
1.3 1.3
C
5H
1.3
0 1.3
CODE
LE
1ZS
64
MO
DET
3.1
0
1B
1.3 0 1.3
1.3 1.3 0
2B
3B
4B
5B
PART NAME
2SC5383T11
2SD2345-S
DTC114TYE
MA132WA
(MO)
4.8
6BREC MODE
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR
-
7B
-
(1ZS)
4.8
8B
-
(LE)
GYR-H/GYR
B
B
WB IR RECEIVER
CODE PART NAME
5H
XP4501
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
1A
2A
FRT-H/FRT
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
A
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC GYR-H/GYR/FRT-H/FRT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
127
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
S-5 DRF-H/DRF Schematic Diagram
1F
1
2F
2
3F
3
4F
4
5F
5
6F
6
7F
7
8F
8
S-5 DRF-H/DRF
F
F
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
7E
6E
8E
E
E
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
D
D
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
8C
C
C
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
To DISC DRIVE
UNIT
(DRV-R PG9701)
To MAN
PG2002
B
B
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
DRF-H/DRF
A
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRF-H/DRF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
128
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
129
(LF)
1
2
4.0
4.7
3
4
5
6
4.7
19C
1.3
(LF)
1.7
0.7
20C
4.0
2.2
2.2
(LF)
(LF)
SHE-H
4.0
2.3
21C
22C
1.6
23C
A
24C
25C
0
26C
0
MIC AMP
(
PB:
REC: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.1
0
27C
28C
29C
30C
1A
(N2)
2A
To MR
CN3401
3A
4A
3.1
0
3.1
0
2.4 2.4 2.4
3.1
TL6101
5A
6A
4.0
2.2
2.2
1.3
TL6102
(LF)
1.6
(LF)
(LF)
B
To BTB [AEL-H]
PG7009
4.0
2.3
0.7
1.7
3.1 0
A/D & D/A CONV.
2.4 2.4 2.4 0
18
3C
BTB
1C-3C
19
2C
20
21
22
23
1C
24
25
2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4
To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7008
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(
PB: 1.4
1.4 0.5
REC:
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.1
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
1.4 0 3.1 3.1
0.5
0
0
BTB
19C-43C
1B
0
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
(N2)
To
EVF UNIT
(N5)
4C
4.8
3.2
4.8
C
4.1
0.1
0
6C
(AE)
5C
31C
32C
EVF_5V
33C
34C
35C
PB:
REC: 0.5
1.5
0.5
(
PB:
REC: 0
(LF)
0.7
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
C0153
0.01
PB: 0
3.1
REC:
0
36C
(MP)
1.5
(
7C
1.5
1.0
1C
(
1.7
1.2
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 3.5
37C
38C
NECW008AT
To
GYR-H
PG1401
8C
39C
To
EVF UNIT
9C
D
0
1.2 1.7
0
1.4
0.6
40C
41C
42C
43C
4.8 0.6(0.4)
NECW008AT
4.8
13C
0
PB:
REC: 0
(
2D
3D
2.5
4.3
0
3.1(0)
3.0
1.5
(LF)
4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0
1.5
0.7
To
SHOE
TERMINAL
3.1
(0)
0
0 0
1.6 2.2
NECW008AT
-
0
2.4
1.0
1E
2E
EVF_5V
4D
3E
0
1.3
0
4.0
1.2
0
1.5
NECW008AT
5D
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
6D
0
CODE
AE
LF
N5
MP
5.6
PART NAM
2SB1424R
2SC5383-T1
RT1N144UMA133
MA8056-M
ONE VOLTAGE:PB O
1
3.5
2F
2
3.5
3F
3.2
0
S-8 SHE
3.5
135
1F
6E
0
S-7 SHE-H
5E
3.5
0
F
4E
3.2
3.5
0
3.2
0.1
(LF)
3.2
0.7
0
18C
3.1
0
4.0
0
3.2
0
LCD DRIVER
1.7 2.8
17C
0.5
1.0
1.3
4.8
1.3 1.2 0
131
16C
1.5
2.4
NECW008AT
E
2.0
0
4.0
1.7
2.8
-
-
-
0
3.1
(LF)
0.7
1.5
1.5
3.2
0.1
1.6
1.5
15C
CODE
PART NAME
2SC5383-T11-1F
LF
RT1N144U-T11-1
N2
MA132K
MI
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
1.4
VIDOE/AUDIO
AMP
1.4
14C
0
3.0(0)
1.3
1.5
0
PB:
1.3
NECW008AT
REC: 1.2
1.6
1.1
PB:
REC: 1.2
3.0(0)
0
3.4
(
0
1.6 0.5
1.5
(LF)
4.8
2.0 1.2
3.0
(
0.7
(
4.8
1D
PB:
REC: 3.7
3.1
1.0
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 2.2
3
4F
4
5F
5
6F
6
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
(MI)
1.5
3.2 3.2
0
12C
(LF)
0.7
11C
BTB
4C-18C
(
1.3
10C
PB:
REC: 0.4
AUD [AEL-H/AEL]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1F
1
2F
2
3F
3
4F
4
S-9 USB-H/USB
5F
5
6
6F
7F
7
8F
8
S-11 MR
F
F
3.2
0
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
3.2
6E
7E
8E
FLC181Z16SMMZ
REVERSE
SW
REVERSE
E
E
To
MAN-H/MAN
PG5001
PC TERMINAL
USB-H/USB
1D
2D
3D
To LCD
PG3403
4D
3.2
5D
6D
7D
0
8D
3.2
OPEN/CLOSE
SW
D
D
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
MR
7C
8C
S-10 SAF-H/SAF
C
C
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
B
B
To
SWL2
PG8012
To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7004
SAF-H/SAF
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
A
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC USB-H/USB/SAF-H/SAF/MR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
130
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
129
(LF)
1
2
4.0
4.7
3
4
5
6
4.7
19C
1.3
(LF)
1.7
0.7
20C
4.0
2.2
2.2
(LF)
(LF)
SHE-H
4.0
2.3
21C
22C
1.6
23C
A
24C
25C
0
26C
0
MIC AMP
(
PB:
REC: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.1
0
27C
28C
29C
30C
1A
(N2)
2A
To MR
CN3401
3A
4A
3.1
0
3.1
0
2.4 2.4 2.4
3.1
TL6101
5A
6A
4.0
2.2
2.2
1.3
TL6102
(LF)
1.6
(LF)
(LF)
B
To BTB [AEL-H]
PG7009
4.0
2.3
0.7
1.7
3.1 0
A/D & D/A CONV.
2.4 2.4 2.4 0
18
3C
BTB
1C-3C
19
2C
20
21
22
23
1C
24
25
2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4
To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7008
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(
PB: 1.4
1.4 0.5
REC:
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.1
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
1.4 0 3.1 3.1
0.5
0
0
BTB
19C-43C
1B
0
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
(N2)
To
EVF UNIT
(N5)
4C
4.8
3.2
4.8
C
4.1
0.1
0
6C
(AE)
5C
31C
32C
EVF_5V
33C
34C
35C
PB:
REC: 0.5
1.5
0.5
(
PB:
REC: 0
(LF)
0.7
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
C0153
0.01
PB: 0
3.1
REC:
0
36C
(MP)
1.5
(
7C
1.5
1.0
1C
(
1.7
1.2
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 3.5
37C
38C
NECW008AT
To
GYR-H
PG1401
8C
39C
To
EVF UNIT
9C
D
0
1.2 1.7
0
1.4
0.6
40C
41C
42C
43C
4.8 0.6(0.4)
NECW008AT
4.8
13C
0
PB:
REC: 0
(
2D
3D
2.5
4.3
0
3.1(0)
3.0
1.5
(LF)
4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0
1.5
0.7
To
SHOE
TERMINAL
3.1
(0)
0
0 0
1.6 2.2
NECW008AT
-
0
2.4
1.0
1E
2E
EVF_5V
4D
3E
0
1.3
0
4.0
1.2
0
1.5
NECW008AT
5D
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
6D
0
CODE
AE
LF
N5
MP
5.6
PART NAM
2SB1424R
2SC5383-T1
RT1N144UMA133
MA8056-M
ONE VOLTAGE:PB O
1
3.5
2F
2
3.5
3F
3.2
0
S-8 SHE
3.5
135
1F
6E
0
S-7 SHE-H
5E
3.5
0
F
4E
3.2
3.5
0
3.2
0.1
(LF)
3.2
0.7
0
18C
3.1
0
4.0
0
3.2
0
LCD DRIVER
1.7 2.8
17C
0.5
1.0
1.3
4.8
1.3 1.2 0
131
16C
1.5
2.4
NECW008AT
E
2.0
0
4.0
1.7
2.8
-
-
-
0
3.1
(LF)
0.7
1.5
1.5
3.2
0.1
1.6
1.5
15C
CODE
PART NAME
2SC5383-T11-1F
LF
RT1N144U-T11-1
N2
MA132K
MI
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
1.4
VIDOE/AUDIO
AMP
1.4
14C
0
3.0(0)
1.3
1.5
0
PB:
1.3
NECW008AT
REC: 1.2
1.6
1.1
PB:
REC: 1.2
3.0(0)
0
3.4
(
0
1.6 0.5
1.5
(LF)
4.8
2.0 1.2
3.0
(
0.7
(
4.8
1D
PB:
REC: 3.7
3.1
1.0
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 2.2
3
4F
4
5F
5
6F
6
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
(MI)
1.5
3.2 3.2
0
12C
(LF)
0.7
11C
BTB
4C-18C
(
1.3
10C
PB:
REC: 0.4
AUD [AEL-H/AEL]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
0.068
0.22
C1333 R1303
Not
100k
Provided
2.2
R1318
R1329
R1330
R1332
10k
47k
47k
27k
8.2k
27k
27k
39k
180k
R1336 R1348
Not
Not
Provided Provided
10k
5.6k
R1350
R1355
0
100
180
120
1
0.01
1F
C1324
560p
S-13 SEN-H
1
C1316
Provided
M50
14.7
9.8
(LF)
2F
2E
2D
8.0 (AE) 5.1
0
(0 or 0.7)
7.2
M70:27k
M50:39k
R1364
2.2k
Not
Provided
2A
7A
8A
9A
10A
2
M70:47k
M50:27k
10.5
7.5
2SC3930
18A
19A
M70:47k
M50:27k
M70:100
M50:120
8.2
15A
14A
12A
13A
M70:560p
M50:0.068
7.4 8.0 1.2 4.8 0
0
0
M70 : 3.7
M50 : 3.1
1.3
M70:10k
M50:8.2k
0
(
PB: 0
REC:
1.0
(1.4)
3.1
0
PB: 3.1
3.1
REC:
0
0
3.1
0
(
0(0.5-2.7)
0
3.1
0
0
10.5
0
M70:0.01
M50:0.22
0
FOCUS/ZOOM
IRIS DRIVE
5.1
2.2k
1.4
10.5
1.4
0.9
0
4F
1.0(0.2-2.6)
3.1
0
4E
4D
4C
4B
4A
1.4
3A
C1333
2.2
R1336
10k
M50
1.4
1.4 1.4 1.9
0.1 1.0 2.8
3.1 0
17A
16A
M70 : 3.7
M50 : 3.1
4
4
PB: 0
REC:
(
PB: 0
REC:
(
4A
1A
2.8
1.5
(BQ)
5F
5E
15
0
-7
0
-7
5D
5C
5B
5A
132
CCD IMAGE SENSOR
32.0
10.0
R1348
5.6k
M50
0
0
M70:100k
M50:180k
-7.0
0
0
1.4
0
5A
0
0
1.4
15.0
3
PB: 10.5
REC:
3
PB: 12.0
13.3
REC:
10.0
(
(
3.1
0
To
LENS
UNIT
47/10
0
3F
3E
3D
3C
3B
3A
R1350
M70:0
M50:180
2
PART NAME
UN9212
0
2C
2SC3930
10.5
2B
CODE
8B
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
2A
2.5
(2.5 or 0.1)
M70
M70
F
PG1301 PG1302
Not
Provided
Not
Provided
Provided
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
Components marked * are different between
M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] :
Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components.
M70
To
LENS
UNIT
E
D
C
B
A
M50
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.8
1.3
NJM2872AF285
3V REG
1.0
IC1303
4
4.8 or 0
1.4
1.4
0
0
4
4.8 0
4.8
B
GND
11A
20A
1.4
1.8
(0.2-2.6)
21A
4.8
(4.8 or 0)
0
(0 or 3.1)
22A
(N5)
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
134
7F
7E
7D
7C
7B
7
7
SEN-H
7A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, V
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
BTB
1A-22A
LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL]
6
6
Components marked * are different between VDR-M70 and
VDR-M50: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the
different components.
PART NAME
2SB1424R
2SC4617
2SC5383-T11-1F
RT1N144U-T11-1
6F
0
CODE
AE
BQ
LF
N5
6E
6D
3
6C
6B
6A
1
6A
1.4
REG
VSS
2
4.8
A
0
5
V+
0.5
(0.2-2.6)
IC1304
F DET
5
GND
3
0
2
0.5
(0.2-2.6)
10.5
4.8
5
1
(8B)
5
VCC
F DET
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
5
6
6F
7F
7
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
1E
ZD7002
8A
9A
10A
Not Provided
CODE
PART NAME
2E
RT1N144U-T11-1
N5
UMH9N
H9
NDS336P
336
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
3E
BM10696R
R7065
BM10345R RD13UMB1
BM10696R
470k
BM10696R
R7061
220k
BM10696R
R7060
N5
BM10696R
Q7002
336
BM10696R
Q7001
0.01
F
7A
BM10349R
M50
C7021
BM10696R
M70
BM10349R
Components marked * are different between
M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] :
Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components.
F
8
8F
1
2
3
5F
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
25
S-14 BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
4
4F
To LCD
PG3401
5
3
3F
22
2
2F
24
1
1F
11A
12A
LENS DRIVE
1A-22A
13A
4E
5E
6E
7E
8E
14A
15A
16A
17A
18A
19A
20A
FOR ADJUSTMENT
21A
E
E
22A
19C
20C
21C
22C
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
24C
4.6 0
1.2
4.6
NJM2872AF34
3V REG
25C
2.8
26C
IC7002
5
28C
23C
30C
REG
D
R7031
1k
27C
4
VSS
2
1
To
FRT-H/FRT
PG1801
D
29C
3
31C
32C
33C
34C
36C
37C
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
8C
To
SAF-H/SAF
CN7004
38C
39C
40C
41C
42C
11C
TL7030
TL7028
4.8
0
C
5C
4.8
3.1
0
7C
0
8C
10C
1.7
9C
1.1(0)
12C
3.1
3.1
13C
0
0
C
6C
0
1.7
3.3
0
AUD
1C-43C
14C
15C
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
M/M
8B
16C
35C
17C
18C
1C
2C
3C
43C
B
M70
B
4C
BM10345R 0 (336)7.4
C7021
0.01
M70
1A
2A
3A
7.1
4A
20B
21B
22B
M70 : To SHE-H PG0151
M50 : To SHE PG0151
6.8
23B
0
5A
6A
7A
(N5)
0
8A
24B
25B
26B
27B
EVF
20B-33B
28B
29B
0
A
0
30B
0
31B
To MAN-H/MAN PG1501
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
18B
19B
0
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
(H9)
A
32B
0
0
33B
EVF
10B-19B
EVF
1B-9B
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC
BTB [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
133
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
0.068
0.22
C1333 R1303
Not
100k
Provided
2.2
R1318
R1329
R1330
R1332
10k
47k
47k
27k
8.2k
27k
27k
39k
180k
R1336 R1348
Not
Not
Provided Provided
10k
5.6k
R1350
R1355
0
100
180
120
1
0.01
1F
C1324
560p
S-13 SEN-H
1
C1316
Provided
M50
14.7
9.8
(LF)
2F
2E
2D
8.0 (AE) 5.1
0
(0 or 0.7)
7.2
M70:27k
M50:39k
R1364
2.2k
Not
Provided
2A
7A
8A
9A
10A
2
M70:47k
M50:27k
10.5
7.5
2SC3930
18A
19A
M70:47k
M50:27k
M70:100
M50:120
8.2
15A
14A
12A
13A
M70:560p
M50:0.068
7.4 8.0 1.2 4.8 0
0
0
M70 : 3.7
M50 : 3.1
1.3
M70:10k
M50:8.2k
0
(
PB: 0
REC:
1.0
(1.4)
3.1
0
PB: 3.1
3.1
REC:
0
0
3.1
0
(
0(0.5-2.7)
0
3.1
0
0
10.5
0
M70:0.01
M50:0.22
0
FOCUS/ZOOM
IRIS DRIVE
5.1
2.2k
1.4
10.5
1.4
0.9
0
4F
1.0(0.2-2.6)
3.1
0
4E
4D
4C
4B
4A
1.4
3A
C1333
2.2
R1336
10k
M50
1.4
1.4 1.4 1.9
0.1 1.0 2.8
3.1 0
17A
16A
M70 : 3.7
M50 : 3.1
4
4
PB: 0
REC:
(
PB: 0
REC:
(
4A
1A
2.8
1.5
(BQ)
5F
5E
15
0
-7
0
-7
5D
5C
5B
5A
132
CCD IMAGE SENSOR
32.0
10.0
R1348
5.6k
M50
0
0
M70:100k
M50:180k
-7.0
0
0
1.4
0
5A
0
0
1.4
15.0
3
PB: 10.5
REC:
3
PB: 12.0
13.3
REC:
10.0
(
(
3.1
0
To
LENS
UNIT
47/10
0
3F
3E
3D
3C
3B
3A
R1350
M70:0
M50:180
2
PART NAME
UN9212
0
2C
2SC3930
10.5
2B
CODE
8B
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
2A
2.5
(2.5 or 0.1)
M70
M70
F
PG1301 PG1302
Not
Provided
Not
Provided
Provided
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
Components marked * are different between
M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] :
Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components.
M70
To
LENS
UNIT
E
D
C
B
A
M50
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
2.8
1.3
NJM2872AF285
3V REG
1.0
IC1303
4
4.8 or 0
1.4
1.4
0
0
4
4.8 0
4.8
B
GND
11A
20A
1.4
1.8
(0.2-2.6)
21A
4.8
(4.8 or 0)
0
(0 or 3.1)
22A
(N5)
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
134
7F
7E
7D
7C
7B
7
7
SEN-H
7A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, V
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
BTB
1A-22A
LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL]
6
6
Components marked * are different between VDR-M70 and
VDR-M50: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the
different components.
PART NAME
2SB1424R
2SC4617
2SC5383-T11-1F
RT1N144U-T11-1
6F
0
CODE
AE
BQ
LF
N5
6E
6D
3
6C
6B
6A
1
6A
1.4
REG
VSS
2
4.8
A
0
5
V+
0.5
(0.2-2.6)
IC1304
F DET
5
GND
3
0
2
0.5
(0.2-2.6)
10.5
4.8
5
1
(8B)
5
VCC
F DET
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
129
(LF)
1
2
4.0
4.7
3
4
5
6
4.7
19C
1.3
(LF)
1.7
0.7
20C
4.0
2.2
2.2
(LF)
(LF)
SHE-H
4.0
2.3
21C
22C
1.6
23C
A
24C
25C
0
26C
0
MIC AMP
(
PB:
REC: 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.1
0
27C
28C
29C
30C
1A
(N2)
2A
To MR
CN3401
3A
4A
3.1
0
3.1
0
2.4 2.4 2.4
3.1
TL6101
5A
6A
4.0
2.2
2.2
1.3
TL6102
(LF)
1.6
(LF)
(LF)
B
To BTB [AEL-H]
PG7009
4.0
2.3
0.7
1.7
3.1 0
A/D & D/A CONV.
2.4 2.4 2.4 0
18
3C
BTB
1C-3C
19
2C
20
21
22
23
1C
24
25
2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4
To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7008
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
(
PB: 1.4
1.4 0.5
REC:
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.1
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
1.4 0 3.1 3.1
0.5
0
0
BTB
19C-43C
1B
0
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
(N2)
To
EVF UNIT
(N5)
4C
4.8
3.2
4.8
C
4.1
0.1
0
6C
(AE)
5C
31C
32C
EVF_5V
33C
34C
35C
PB:
REC: 0.5
1.5
0.5
(
PB:
REC: 0
(LF)
0.7
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
C0153
0.01
PB: 0
3.1
REC:
0
36C
(MP)
1.5
(
7C
1.5
1.0
1C
(
1.7
1.2
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 3.5
37C
38C
NECW008AT
To
GYR-H
PG1401
8C
39C
To
EVF UNIT
9C
D
0
1.2 1.7
0
1.4
0.6
40C
41C
42C
43C
4.8 0.6(0.4)
NECW008AT
4.8
13C
0
PB:
REC: 0
(
2D
3D
2.5
4.3
0
3.1(0)
3.0
1.5
(LF)
4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0
1.5
0.7
To
SHOE
TERMINAL
3.1
(0)
0
0 0
1.6 2.2
NECW008AT
-
0
2.4
1.0
1E
2E
EVF_5V
4D
3E
0
1.3
0
4.0
1.2
0
1.5
NECW008AT
5D
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
3.5
0
6D
0
CODE
AE
LF
N5
MP
5.6
PART NAM
2SB1424R
2SC5383-T1
RT1N144UMA133
MA8056-M
ONE VOLTAGE:PB O
1
3.5
2F
2
3.5
3F
3.2
0
S-8 SHE
3.5
135
1F
6E
0
S-7 SHE-H
5E
3.5
0
F
4E
3.2
3.5
0
3.2
0.1
(LF)
3.2
0.7
0
18C
3.1
0
4.0
0
3.2
0
LCD DRIVER
1.7 2.8
17C
0.5
1.0
1.3
4.8
1.3 1.2 0
131
16C
1.5
2.4
NECW008AT
E
2.0
0
4.0
1.7
2.8
-
-
-
0
3.1
(LF)
0.7
1.5
1.5
3.2
0.1
1.6
1.5
15C
CODE
PART NAME
2SC5383-T11-1F
LF
RT1N144U-T11-1
N2
MA132K
MI
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
1.4
VIDOE/AUDIO
AMP
1.4
14C
0
3.0(0)
1.3
1.5
0
PB:
1.3
NECW008AT
REC: 1.2
1.6
1.1
PB:
REC: 1.2
3.0(0)
0
3.4
(
0
1.6 0.5
1.5
(LF)
4.8
2.0 1.2
3.0
(
0.7
(
4.8
1D
PB:
REC: 3.7
3.1
1.0
1.3
(
PB:
REC: 2.2
3
4F
4
5F
5
6F
6
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
(MI)
1.5
3.2 3.2
0
12C
(LF)
0.7
11C
BTB
4C-18C
(
1.3
10C
PB:
REC: 0.4
AUD [AEL-H/AEL]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
1F
2F
2
3F
3
4
4F
5
5F
6F
6
7
7F
8F
8
S-17 EVF [AEL-H/AEL]
F
F
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
21B
4.3
4.3
8E
3.6
20B
0.1
E
(N5)
E
3.1
0
33B
1D
23B
2D
3D
4D
5D
4.2 8.8 1.5
0
1.4
1.5
8.8
0
1.5 0
0
2.0
-
6.4
6.5
0.8
0.8
3.0
2C
3.0
3C
0
4C
28B
27B
3.0
0
3.1
0
10B
3.0
0
3.1
0
3.0
0
3.1
0
11B
9B
8B
12B
6C
7C
8C
3.1
0
0
6B
0
14B
5B
4B
3B
25B
24B
0 3.0 3.2
0
0
3.1 3.1
BTB
1B-19B
15B
3.0
0
0
3.0 1.4 0
7B
13B
0
3.1
0
0
26B
D
3.1
0
5C
EVF DRIVER
0
C
8D
3.0
0
5.0
1.5
3.5
1C
TL3701
(GND)
0
0
BTB
20B-33B
7D
0
3.0
D
6D
0
0
C
16B
3.1
0
17B
2B
3.1
0
18B
32B
1B
19B
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
22B
30B
CODE
N5
31B
B
29B
PART NAME
RT1N144U-T11-1
B
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
EVF [AEL-H/AEL]
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
A
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC EVF [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
5
4
136
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
1F
2F
2
3
3F
4
4F
S-18 SWL2
F
F
DISC
NAVIGATION
1E
2E
3E
4E
To
SWL3-H/SWL3
PG8017
E
SELECT
E
MENU
1D
2D
3D
4D
D
D
STOP/EXIT
1C
2C
3C
4C
C
C
To
SIDE CASE-L
1B
2B
3B
4B
L
B
UP
B
CENTER
LOW R
To
SAF-H/SAF
CN8012
1A
JOYSTICK
2A
SWL24A
3A
A
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SWL2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
4
137
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MODE
VCOREF 1
SYNC
SEL
FILTER 2
ATT
SYNC
PICTURE
COM-DC
+5V
36 Vcc2
2.5V
COMLEVEL
SEL
LPF
TRAP
SUBCONTRAST
33 B OUT
USERBRIGHT
CONTRAST
32 GND
LPF TRAP SUBSUB- CONTRAST
CONT R CONT B
RP
IR
GAMMA1
GAMMA2
SERIAL
I/F
SCK 7
FBB
BOUT
VCCCOM
COMOUT
GNDCOM
FBCOM
CSHO
CSVO
SHIN
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SIG.C
BLKL1
RMTL1
Buf
-1
-2
SUBBRIGHT
Buf
R-BRT
B-BRT
CONT
R-CONT
SUB
CNTRST
RIN 53
CLAMP
CNTRST
GIN 54
CLAMP
CNTRST
BIN 55
POL
W/B
LIMITER
CLAMP
POL SW
POL SW
SUB
BRIGHT
COM
BRIGHT
COM DC
31 VD
29 XENB
VGATE
SDAT 8
30 GND
SYNC IN 57
+3V
29 VDD
VSEP IC 58
M FILTER
GAMMA-2
GAMMA-1
GAMMA
SYNC SEP
BRT
CONT
R-BRT
B-BRT
GAMMA-1
GAMMA-2
SIG C
V SEP
SERIAL
I/F
XCLR 10
27 HDO
PLL
COUNTER
VD 11
TEST1 61
TIMING GENERATOR
VCK
VST
37
36
35
34
52
CLAMP
VM
29
MIX
ATT
-9dB
BUFF
S-DC
57
HO+
F.No
HREF
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
H2
GND 27
A2 39
H1
MUTE
LPF
24
EVR
MUTE
LPF
23
1/N
61 VCC
SP
DC SHIFT
DC SHIFT
MUTE
MUTE
DC SHIFT
DC SHIFT
VCC
2.2K
20
MUTE
CTL
19
C2 46
3
4
5
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
13 EIR-
SERIAL-PARARELLE
DECORDER
6
7
8
9
VAMP
10
11
12
REG(B)
5
VB
4
CEXT
3
LGND
2
CLOSE
1
16
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC IC BLOCK
5
4
138
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
14 EIR+
48
OPEN
1/2VCC
2
15 VIR
H5
VD
17
1
16 IRM+
IRIS
LOGIC
18
64
1
17 PGND2
C1 47
VM
SDATA
63 GND
SP
MUTE
CTL
EXT
62
MUTE 21
TC
B
19 VSHT
D/A
CONVERTER
&
DRIVE
CONTROL
CH
OUTPUT
STAGE
D1 45
60
CONT
OUT
18 IRM-
44
VCC 22
59
21 CONT20
41
D2 43
VREF
SP
PGND
A
22 CONT+
H4
B2 42
EVR
23 REFI
H0
CH
OUTPUT
STAGE
B1 40
PGND
24 REFO
H3
LATCH
58
A1 38
26
EVR
CTL
25
VREF
56
35
SCLK
55
B
BPF
GCA
3dB
DOS
B
36
37
28
DC
HO-
30
VH+
BUFF
C
VH-
31
LPF
DOS
B
54
16
HR
ATT
-9dB
15dB
53
15
H.G.
DOS
W
14
VDD
15dB
51
IC1301
UPD168153
FOCUS/ZOOM/IRIS DRIVE
32
STB
DV
13
33
GCA
3dB
15dB
50
12
OSC IN
49
11
GND
IF
DY
C
10
VSS0
EN
38
HD
9
HD
DWN
39
BLSW BLHD
8
BLHD
XSTB
40
7
BLSW
PCG
41
6
VDD0
VDD
+3V
42
5
VDD2
HST
43
4
TEST3
WIDE
44
AND
3
SCLK
HCK2
45
2
17 XSTH
TEST8
HCK1
46
GND
1
DATA
24
LOAD
23
TEST5
22
TEST4
21
VSS1
20
RPD
19
VDD1
18
D
18 STH
RESET
47
17
19 CKH2
EXT
48
16
RGT
IC6103
AN2903FJQ-V
VIDEO AMP
SERIAL
BUS I/F
15
21 TEST6
PD
VCO
GND1 64
14
24 DSG
VCOADJ
25 GND
13
25 XSTV
20 CKH1
HGATE
H-SKEN DET
CLPIN 63
GND 12
26 STV
22 TEST7
HCNT
H-PULSE
CLP
SPLK
IN/EXT
TEST2 62
26 POF
D/A
E
27 CKV2
23 XDSG
HDIN 60
H.FILTER
FRP
VCO-ADJ
COM-BRT
R-CONT
B-CONT
BLKL1
RMTL1
COM DC
HAFC
PLL COUNTER
L DECODER
28 VDO
TEST1 9
VPAL2
VPIN
B-CONT
VDIN 59
FRP XCLP XSTBY SH1 SH2 SH3 SH4
VPAL1
28 CKV1
RESET 56
POL
VCNT
S/H
SUB
CNTRST
CNTRST
30 ENB
COM-BRT
BRT
BRIGHT
31 GND
SUBSUBBRIGHT R BRIGHT B
STD BLK
REG
Buf
Buf
32 VSS2
POL
USERBRIGHT
S/H
Buf
NC 51
HUE COLOR
CK
D
OSDOUT 50
VREG 52
+3V
Vcc1 5
SEN 6
45
34 R OUT
CLOCK
GENERATOR
PHASE
COMPARATOR
RPD 4
46
COM-DC
VCO
GND 3
47
VCC1 49
35 G OUT
MATRIX
HUE
DL
COLOR
ATT
E
COMLEVEL
ATT
48
F
DA
PICTUREGAIN PICTURE-FO
SYNC
SEP
GND2
37
GOUT
38
FBG
39
ROUT
40
FBR
41
VCC2
42
IC3701
LV4149W
EVF DRIVER
SIGCENT
PSIG OUT
43
DA OUT
COMDC
44
COM OUT
45
COMREF
46
DA OUT
G/Y
47
REF
R/R-Y
48
Vcc1
+3V
B/B-Y
F
SYNC IN
IC3401
CXM3009TQ
LCD DRIVER
GND
S-19 IC BLOCK
6
7
8
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C Circuit Board Diagrams
C-1 GYR-H
C-2 GYR
PG1401
PG1401
GYR -SIDE AGYR-H -SIDE A-
GYR -SIDE B-
GYR-H -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
[PATTERN No.JD1176-5]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC GYR-H/GYR CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
139
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-3 FRT-H
C-4 FRT
FRT -SIDE A-
FRT-H -SIDE A-
PD1801
PD1801
FRT-H -SIDE B-
FRT -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JD1176-5]
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC FRT-H/FRT CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
140
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-5 DRF-H/DRF
C-6 SHE
36
BA1801
36
40
21
1
20
DRF-H -SIDE B-
DRF-H -SIDE A-
[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]
SHE -SIDE A70
1
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
36
35
DRF -SIDE A-
35
1
36
70
DRF -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRF-H/DRF/SHE CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
141
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
SHE -SIDE B-
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-7 SHE-H
C-8 SWL2
CN0152
C0153
BA1801
SWL2 -SIDE A-
SWL2 -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2255-1]
SHE-H -SIDE B-
SHE-H -SIDE A-
[PATTERN No.JD1176-5]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SHE-H/SWL2 CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
142
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-9 USB-H/USB
C-10 MR
CN3401
CN8101
USB-H -SIDE A-
CN8101
USB-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]
5
1
USB -SIDE A-
USB -SIDE B-
MR
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
[PATTERN No.JA1183-2]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC USB-H/USB/MR CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
143
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-11 LCD
4
4C
3
3C
2
2C
1
1
1C
C
1C
1C
C
C
4B
3
3B
2B
2B
TL3418
2A
2A
2
3C
C
4C
2B
B
3B
B
4B
B
B
1A
A
3
4
C
1A
A
4
2C
C
1B
1
B
B
3A
3
A
3
C
1B
B
B
4A
A
2
2A
3A
4A
4A
A
A
1
1
LCD -SIDE A-
2
3
4
LCD -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2244-4]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LCD CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
144
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-12 SEN-H
C-13 SAF-H/SAF
CN7004
IC1001
1
PG1002
14
7
CN8012
SAF-H -SIDE A-
8
SAF-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-5]
SEN-H -SIDE A-
CN7004
CN8012
SAF -SIDE A-
SAF -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
SEN-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-5]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SEN-H/SAF-H/SAF CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
145
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-14 AEL-H/AEL
4
4H
3
3H
2
1
2H
1
1H
1
H
2
1H
1
H
H
2H
4
3H
4H
H
H
R7031
H
3
4G
3G
3G
2G
1G
G
1G
1G
G
G
4F
4
F
3F
3
F
2F
2
F
1F
1F
F
F
3E
3
E
2E
2E
1E
E
20
4D
D
3D
3
D
2D
21
1D
1D
C7201
E
D
D
1
4C
3C
3C
2C
2C
40
1C
1C
C
C
4B
3B
2B
B
Components marked * are different between
M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and
M50 [including EG, EB,GC] :
Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the
different components.
PG1301
Provided
PG1302
Not Pro vided
C1316
560p
C1324
0.01
C1333
Not Pro vided
C7021
0.01
R1303
100k
R1318
10k
R1329
47k
R1330
47k
R1332
27k
R1336
Not Pro vided
R1348
Not Pro vided
R1350
0
R1355
100
R1364
2.2k
R7060
220k
R7061
470k
BM10345R
R7065
NDS336P
Q7001
Q7002 RT1N144U-T11-1
RD13UMB-1
ZD7002
3A
A
1F
1F
2A
2
A
2F
2F
4F
4F
60
1
F
M50
Not Pro vided
Provided
0.068
0.22
2.2
Not Pro vided
180k
8.2k
27k
27k
39k
10k
5.6k
180
120
Not Pro vided
120
61
1E
1E
2E
3E
3E
4E
4E
TL3701
(GND)
E
E
1D
D
2D
2D
3D
3
D
4
4D
TL7041
D
D
Not Pro vided
1C
1
C
2C
2C
3
3C
4C
TL6102
C
C
TL6101
2B
2B
3B
4B
B
B
1A
1A
A
A
3F
3
F
F
1B
B
B
4A
4G
G
1B
B
B
3G
3G
G
M70
4E
E
2G
2A
2
A
3A
TL3715
A
4A
A
TL7028
TL7030
4
3
2
1
1
AEL-H/AEL -SIDE A-
2
AEL-H/AEL -SIDE B-
3
4
[PATTERN No.JA2237-4]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AEL-H/AEL CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
146
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-15 MAN-H/MAN
3.1
8.0
3.2 3.2
62
12
3.1
1
3.0
3.1
4.6
3.1
25
M70 : 15.0
M50: 12.0
31
3.1
56
TL6006
TL6009
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
TL6010
3.1
4.8
60
-7.0
7.9
TL2089
TL2090
7.9
TL2085
TL2084
TL2086
TL2095
TL2082
17 14
10
24
61
78 80 83
7.9
97
102
4.8
8.5
1
M70
120
M50 : 12.0
M70 : 15.0
3.0 3.1
4.8 8.0
If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board,
the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing.
If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit
board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since
these circuit boards are included in this unit.
Because of this servicing method, this service manual
does not include any schematic circuit diagrams.
For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple
diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary
for troubleshooting.
TL2091
3.2
4.8
M50 : -7.0
M70 : -7.0
3.1
3.1
M50
M70
3.1
14
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
M70 : 3.4
M50 : 3.1
3.1
5.1
5.1
3.4
Components marked * are different between
M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and
M50 [including EG, EB,GC] :
Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the
different components.
3.2
3.2
3.1
3.1
TL1536
TL1534
3.1
TL0522
M70 (EG,EB) M70 (GC)
IC2008
Provided
PG2001
16PIN
LINE INPUT
Provided
Not Provided
FUNCTION
M50 (EG,EB) M50 (GC)
Not Provided
3.1
3.2
3.2
TL1535
3.1
3.1
3.2
10
3.1
M70
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.1
3.2
3.2
14PIN
Not Provided
Provided
3.2
3.2
Note: Voltage values are in REC status.
Model names "M70" and "M50" shown for voltage
values include (EG, EB) and (GC).
TL0515
TL0504
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
TL0512
1
2.5
TL0511
70
TL0513
-7.9
-7.0
TL0510
7.9
2.5
2.5
2.5
TL1543
TL0517
TL1547
25
30
3.3
2.5
4.8
4.7
35
7.9
40
2.5
4.8
4.7
36
7.9
7.9
F0501
F0504
F0503
7.9
F0502
-7.9
TL0521(GND)
TL0520
(GND)
TL0518
MAN-H/MAN -SIDE A-
MAN-H/MAN -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JA2226-4]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC MAN-H/MAN CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
147
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
1,3 5,7
Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R,
MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
3.1
M70 : 3.7
M50 : 3.1
12.0 2.5
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-16 DRV-R
C-17 MOD
Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R,
MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board,
the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing.
If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit
board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since
these circuit boards are included in this unit.
Because of this servicing method, this service manual
does not include any schematic circuit diagrams.
For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple
diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary
for troubleshooting.
Note: Voltage values are in reading status.
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated,
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup.
Note: Voltage values are in reading status.
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated,
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup.
4.6
4.6
3.4
4.7
4.7
4.7
3.3
3.3 2.5 4.8 4.7
1
2 5
30
70
35
40 36
3.3
2.5
3.3
4.8 4.7
3.4
3.3
3.4
12
4.7
20
4.7
11
3.3
2.2
2.1 3.3
27
46 42
47 43 41
2.1
4.8
4.8
4.8
81 85 89
4.8
3.3
4.8
4.7 4.7
2.1
4.8
3.3
4.8
4.8
4.7
4.8
57 60
2.5
4.7
4.8
4.8
4.7
4.6
4.7
MOD -SIDE A-
4.7
4.8
4.8
4.8
8 11
2.5 4.8
3.3
4.6
4.7
4.7
MOD -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2238-3]
4.7
4.8
3.4
4.8
4.8
4.7
DRV-R -SIDE A-
DRV-R -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2238-3]
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRV-R/MOD CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
148
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
C-18 HDM
Note: Voltage values are in reading status.
Example: 24 (4.7): Terminal no. (voltage value)
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated,
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup.
1
(4.8)
HDM -SIDE A-
Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R,
MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board,
the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing.
If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit
board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since
these circuit boards are included in this unit.
Because of this servicing method, this service manual
does not include any schematic circuit diagrams.
For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple
diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary
for troubleshooting.
HDM -SIDE B-
25 21 20 17
(4.9)(4.9)(4.9) (4.9)
17 16
27 26 25
(3.1)
32 1
14
(4.8)
3
(3.1)
5(4.9)
9(4.9)
11(3.1)
6(4.9)
10(4.9)
41(4.8)
40(4.8)
9 10
8
(4.9)
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC HDM CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM
149
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B Block Diagrams
B-1 Video/Audio Signal Process
F
M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] : PG1301
M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] : PG1302
F
AEL-H/AEL
SDO,
SCLK,
CS_LENS
38-40, 42
ZOOM MOTOR
16-18
2-4
FOCUS/
ZOOM/
IRIS
DRIVE
IRIS MOTOR
26
FOCUS LED
E
IC1503
IC1301
43, 45-47
FOCUS MOTOR
SWL2
IC1303
F DET
IC1302
1
6
Q1303
INV.
TL7030
CS_LCD,
SCLK, SDO
LCD_OPEN
TL0522
(REC)
SYSTEM
CONTROL
P
REM_IN
76 76
19 7
CS_LENS
SD,
MOVIE,
STILL
CS_LCD
7 7
LCD_OPEN
5 5
PG0152
IC1402
OPEN
SW
M70 [Including EG, EB, GC]
IC1505
114 114
29-31,
39, 77,
87, 101
REAL TIME
CLOCK
29-31, 39,
77, 87, 101
IC1507
IC1504
OSD
EEPROM
SDRAM
IC2003
R, G, B
CDS/AGC &
A/D CON
TL2084(V1)
TL2085(V2)
TL2086(V4)
TL2095(V3)
CAMERA
DSP
TL3715
(EVF-G)
REM_IN
20 20
WB_IR
MPEG2
CODEC
IC6103
VIDEO/ADUIO
AMP
C
SYSTEM
MUX/DEMUX
35
38
Y
39
31
SENSOR
H-DRIVE
ATAPI IF
USB IF
AUDIO
ACCELERATOR
TL2089(H2)
TL2090(H1)
TL2091(RG)
EVF UNIT
PG7003 PG
1801
4 4
5 5
IC1801
REMOTE
CONTROL
RECEIVER
D1801, Q1802
Q1803
WB IR
RECEIVER
REC INDI.
PG1802
1, 10 1, 10
LPF
60
C
LD1801, Q1801
50
CLAMP
59
IC1402
H_MOVE
53
12,
16
62,
64
2, 5
MIC
FRT-H/
FRT
CS_AUD,
SCLK,
SDI,
SDO
OPEN ONLY FOR
M70 EB,EG
M50 EB,EG
PG2301 PG2002
46
CLAMP
C
23,
24
D
6-8
VIDEO
44 44
IC1401
V_MOVE
PG0153
7 7
IC2001
5, 6, 5, 6,
8-12 8-12
4 4
TALLY
Y
IC2002
GYRO
DET
EVF_R, EVF_G,
EVF_B
33 33
42 42
SENSOR
V-DRIVE
Q1001
IC1001
BUF
CCD
15 15
8
IMAGE
SENSOR
19 19
34 34
ENCODER &
D/A CONV
2 2
40, 43, 4, 37, 4, 37,
38 38
45
EVF
DRIVER
R_OUT,
G_OUT,
B_OUT
IC2006
MAGIC
TL2082
IC3701
6-8
53-55
GYR-H/GYR
PG0154 PG1401 IC1403
17 17
H_GYRO
CS_EVF,
SCLK,
SDO
21-23 21-23
IC2009
IC2010
SHE-H/SHE
V_GYRO
CS_AUD
CS_LENS, CS_LCD,
CS_AUD, CS_EVF,
SCLK, SDI, SDO
(CCD-OUT)
MR
IC3501
REVERSE
SW
ACCESSORY SHOE
SHOE_SCLK,
SHOE_SDATA,
SHOE_DET
CS_EVF
3, 4,
6-10
AEL-H/AEL
85, 86 85, 86
PG2302
AUD_OUT
DRF-H/
DRF
V_IN
0 ohm
ACK0,
ACK1,
ACK2
24-27
USB-H/USB
CN8101 PG5001
IC4106
IC5001
USB2.0
IF CONT
JK8101
PC CONNECTION
SD IF
CONT
1-12
POWER
SWITCH
19, 20
28, 91, 28, 91,
93 93
FLASH
MEMORY
SH
SDRAM
SH P
90 90
IC4002
MAIN CONTROL P
PG1502
CARD
INSERTION
BLOCK
M70
TL6006(AUD(L))
TL6009(AUD(R))
89 89
J6002
AV
INPUT/OUTPUT
JACK
DOORSW
16, 17
TL1535(SP_OUT-)
TL1536(SP_OUT+)
2
IC6201
A/D & D/A CONV.
21-23
ADATAI
ADATAO
18
20
D/A
CONV
A/D
CONV
1, 2
9, 10
5, 6
3, 4
EXTMIC_LCH,
IC6101 5,
1,14 MIC
10
AMP
TL6101(MIC_INL)
TL6102(MIC_INR)
57, 58 57, 58 EXTMIC_RCH
3, 4
J6001
EXT MIC JACK
54, 55 54, 55
15
B
AUD_IN
TL6010
(VIDEO)
MOVIE,
STILL
MAN-H/MAN
SPEAKER
4, 5
8
2
70 70
1
74 74
72 72
AUD_IO_L,
AUD_IO_R
: REC VIDEO
: PB VIDEO
A
: EXT INPUT VIDEO
C_OUT
V_OUT
Y_OUT
VDR-M70PP/VDR-M50PP VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESS BLOCK DIAGRAM
3
4
5
150
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
1 1
24-26 24-26
TL1547
13
1
LCD_REV
PG7009 PG0151
15, 16, 15, 16,
106 106
TALLY
DOORSW
DOOR
SWITCH
LCD
8 18
(T/W)
EG, EB, GC]
A
LCD PANEL
LCD_R, LCD_G,
LCD_B
WB_IR
PG1002 PG2001
H1, H2, RG,
V1-V4
3-5
33-35
LCD
DRIVER
PG3403 PG1401
R_OUT,
G_OUT,
B_OUT
75 75
PG3402
IC3401
6-8
5-7 19-21
12, 14,
44-46
10, 12, 14 16
H_GYRO
(EJECT SW)
DISC COVER
PG7008 PG3401
V_GYRO
ACCESSLE,
PC-LED
7
REAR COVER
B
SELECT
TL1543
DISC EJECT
DISC
DRIVE
UNIT
2 2
SHOE_SCLK, SHOE_SDATA, SHOE_DET
3
ZOOM LEVER
1-4,
10-12
5 5
2
E
66 66
1
RECORD BUTTON
SEN-H
5
2
LCD_REV
5, 6
ACCESS/PC IND.
M70 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
5
98 98
PG8011
67 67
PG1503
C
107 107
F_DET
ZOOM SENSOR
H1, H2, RG,
V1-V4
SIDE
CASE-L
CN PG
8012 8012
PG CN
7004 7004
48 48
1
FOCUS
SENS
ZOOM
SENS
CCD
IMAGE
SENSOR
FULL AUTO/
FOCUS/EXPOSURE
BLC/DISPLAY/VOL.
DISC NAVI./
MENU/STOP/
JOYSTICK
68 68
FOCUS SENSOR
M50 [Including
(KEY1)
PWM
SELECT
FOCUS
LED
D
SAF-H/
SAF
PG1501 PG7001
IC0501
HALF_FV,
IRIS OPEN,
SHUT_CTRL
2
F DET
ZOOM LED
LENS
UNIT
MAN-H/MAN
TL0504
(REG_ON)
38, 52, 38, 52,
69 69,
4-6
6
7
8
F
B-2 Disc Drive
153
E
D
C
B
A
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
PG2302 PG9701
30-33,
38-41
30-33,
38-41
3V
25, 26 25, 26
3V
PG9301 PG9401
3, 4
3, 4
7, 22,
23
IC9301
1
1
5V
5V
3V
IC9501
M
28, 43
LOCK
UNIT
28, 43
2.5V
IC9603
IC9605
1, 3,
14, 16,
17, 32
IC9201
IC9302
AF
IC9610
4
4
5
5
IC9001
IC9002
8
8
IC9006
IC9007
IC9353
IC9354
IC9417
MOD
PG9103 PG9001
42, 43, 42, 43,
46, 47 46, 47
41 41
11, 12 11, 12
APC
ANALOG
FRONT END
5V
3V
HDM
5V
PG9702
5, 6
EJECT
5V SW
DRV-R
EJECT
5V
LOCK
UNIT
4
Encord Data
DATA
STROBE
4CH BRIDGE
DRIVE
SRAM
151
DISC
DRIVE
UNIT
SPINDLE DRIVE
4
EJECT
MOTOR DRIVE
FLASH ROM
5V
SW
IC9306
8
4
IC9005
3
TR
LASER
DIODE
LASER DIODE
DRIVE
8
IC9305
8
IC9601
FRONT MONITOR
DET. & AMP
3
8
IC9304
5
IC9506
8 DETECTOR
& AMP
DISC
SW
15, 16
SLIDER MOTOR
DISC COVER
SW
(Refer to POWER1)
IC8501
5
6, 8
IC9503
8cm DVD-RAM/DVD-R
DISC
DRF-H/
DRF
3
16, 17,
32, 34,
44, 49,
64
SPINDLE
MOTOR
30
IC9101
5
5V
SW
IC9602
2
2
11, 23, 50,
73, 82
57
IC9502
5
P
5
EEPROM
DRIVE DSP
(SERVO/DSP/
ATAPI/
ENCODER/
DECODER)
SDRAM
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
6
6
PG2
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B-3 Power-1
F
PG0501
F0501 7
1-5
PG1501 PG7001
IC1502
6
SYS3V
SYS3V
BATTERY
TERMINAL
3
8-12
12,
53-56
10
IC1503
Q1302
AF5V
SW
IC1505
IC1301
C3V
REAR COVER
AF+B
11
37,
48
103 103
1.6V
REG
E
ZOOM LEVER/
RECORD
BUTTON/
DISC EJECT
C3V
IC2006
PG1503
IC4106
L6305
81 81
(C3V)
3V
SP3V
3V
14
5
IC4003
5
IC4005
LEN3V
IC4006
34
61
FOCUS/
ZOOM/
IRIS
DRIVE
33
22
LEN5V
30
L6303
22, 30,
36
3V
IC4002
TL0511
4
L6301
78, 79 78, 79
TL0510(C1.6V)
9
IC6103
VIDEO/
AUDIO
AMP
IC1302
32
L6304
51, 54
C3V
L6306
2
5
8
PG1502
POWER/
DOOR SW &
CARD INSERTION
BLOCK
11
IC1504
IC2009
3V
24
D
MAN-H/
MAN
DISC
COVER
M70 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
2
13, 17, 18,
24, 27, 33,
40, 43, 44
6, 20
F DET
IC1507
IC1304
1, 3 3V
5
REG
IC2004
IC2010
5
1,3
OPEN ONLY FOR
M50 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
IC5002
14
5
IC2008
3V
C3V
14
IC2011
10, 17, 32,
42, 51, 57,
62
IC2001
3V
17
LENS UNIT
8
27, 28 27, 28
(B/U_3V)
IC5001
IC6101
L6103
82, 82,
83 83
4
PG0153
10 10
3 3
19
5
MIC AMP
C
TL0518(C15V)
2, 5
M50 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
3V
IC0502
6
-7V
63 63
6
IC2002
0 ohm
TRANSFORMER
15V
OPEN ONLY FOR M70
[Including EG, EB, GC]
M70 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
102 102 C8.5V
8.5V
12V
CCD
IMAGE
SENSOR
5
-7V
1, 3
INV5V
TL0512(CAM5V)
M70 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
PG1001
IC1001
CCD
IMAGE
SENSOR
7
14
15V
5V
SW
5V
REG
3
IC7002
1 3V
5 21 5
REG
39, 47
C3V
18
IC3401
IC3701
IC1501
OPEN ONLY FOR M50
[Including EG, EB, GC]
B
PG3402
L3702
1, 49
L3701
11, 12
EVF
DRIVER
3
L3403
36
L3401
43
IC1402
C
H_MOVE
VDD
(8.5V)
LCD
DRIVER
MR
PG
3403
3, 4
Q3451
BACK
LIGHT SW
IC6001
V_MOVE
LCD PANEL
L3402 18, 29
16 10
3, 4 22, 23
9 17
C3V
INV5V
F0503
LCD
11 15
C8.5V
24,
24, 97 97
1
IC1401
IC1403
8 GYRO
DET
3
LEN5V
119 119
0 ohm
GYR-H/
GYR
EVF5V
VDD(8.5V)
1 1
C3V
PG
7008 PG3401
L7303
12V
PG
2001
EVF UNIT
SHE-H/
SHE
Q3701
EVF5V
SW
C5V
80 80
16, 20
LENS
UNIT
20 20
Q7001, Q7002
HOT SHOE
SW
2
SHOE_UNR M70 [Including EG, EB, GC]
PG0154 CN1401
AF+B
3V
REG
ACCESSORY SHOE
BA1804
30 30
TL7041
F0502
3V
D
CN0152
A/D & D/A
CONV.
M50 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
DECORDER
PG7009 PG0151
BL6201 13, 14
BL6202
IC7001
LEN5V
IC6201
3V
FOCUS MOTOR/
ZOOM MOTOR/
IRIS MOTOR
3, 14
LEN3V
10,13,15,
19,25,31
PG
1302
F DET
8
9
IC2003
E
M70 [Including
EG, EB, GC]
IC1303
C5V
2
FOCUS MOTOR/
ZOOM MOTOR/
IRIS MOTOR
PG
1301
8
L6302
3V
3V REG
PG7002
FOR ADJUSTMENT
19
B/U_3V
B/U3V
F
20 AF+B
10 SYS3V
36 C3V
10 10
IC3501
2 REVERSE
B
SW
IC3502
1 OPEN/
CLOSE SW
TL3418(INV5V)
TL0517(D2.5V)
3
3
7
7
F0504
PG2002 PG2031
2.5V
REG
-7V
28, 43 28, 43
TL0513(D3V)
TL0515(D5V)
SEN-H
5V
REG
A
IC0501
PG7003 PG1801 D1801, Q1802, Q1803
8 8
25, 26 25, 26
25, 26 25, 26
30-33, 30-33,
38-41 38-41
30-33, 30-33,
38-41 38-41
17
23
27, 52,
58, 59
AEL-H/
AEL
PG2302 PG9701
28, 43 28, 43
2.5V
DRF-H/
DRF
WB IR RECEIVER
3V
5V
DRV-R
C3V
(Refer to POWER2)
3 3
2
FRT-H/
FRT
IC1801
REMOTE
CONTROL
RECEIVER
A
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
1
2
3
4
5
152
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
6
7
8
F
B-2 Disc Drive
153
E
D
C
B
A
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
PG2302 PG9701
30-33,
38-41
30-33,
38-41
3V
25, 26 25, 26
3V
PG9301 PG9401
3, 4
3, 4
7, 22,
23
IC9301
1
1
5V
5V
3V
IC9501
M
28, 43
LOCK
UNIT
28, 43
2.5V
IC9603
IC9605
1, 3,
14, 16,
17, 32
IC9201
IC9302
AF
IC9610
4
4
5
5
IC9001
IC9002
8
8
IC9006
IC9007
IC9353
IC9354
IC9417
MOD
PG9103 PG9001
42, 43, 42, 43,
46, 47 46, 47
41 41
11, 12 11, 12
APC
ANALOG
FRONT END
5V
3V
HDM
5V
PG9702
5, 6
EJECT
5V SW
DRV-R
EJECT
5V
LOCK
UNIT
4
Encord Data
DATA
STROBE
4CH BRIDGE
DRIVE
SRAM
151
DISC
DRIVE
UNIT
SPINDLE DRIVE
4
EJECT
MOTOR DRIVE
FLASH ROM
5V
SW
IC9306
8
4
IC9005
3
TR
LASER
DIODE
LASER DIODE
DRIVE
8
IC9305
8
IC9601
FRONT MONITOR
DET. & AMP
3
8
IC9304
5
IC9506
8 DETECTOR
& AMP
DISC
SW
15, 16
SLIDER MOTOR
DISC COVER
SW
(Refer to POWER1)
IC8501
5
6, 8
IC9503
8cm DVD-RAM/DVD-R
DISC
DRF-H/
DRF
3
16, 17,
32, 34,
44, 49,
64
SPINDLE
MOTOR
30
IC9101
5
5V
SW
IC9602
2
2
11, 23, 50,
73, 82
57
IC9502
5
P
5
EEPROM
DRIVE DSP
(SERVO/DSP/
ATAPI/
ENCODER/
DECODER)
SDRAM
VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
6
6
PG2
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
154
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8 EXPLODED VIEWS
8.1.
MAIN SECTION
155
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
156
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8.2.
LCD BLOCK SECTION
157
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8.3.
CAMERA LENS SECTION
8.3.1.
For VDR-M70
8.3.2.
For VDR-M50
158
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8.4.
EVF BLOCK SECTION
159
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
8.5.
PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES SECTION
160
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
9 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
9.1.
9.1.1.
Ref.
No.
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT
PARTS LIST
FRAME & CASING SECTION
PARTS LIST
Part No.
Part Name & Description
1
JP40151
PWB ASSY FRT-H
1
JP40061
PWB ASSY FRT
2
JP40161
PWB ASSY GYR-H
2
JP40071
PWB ASSY GYR
3
JP40171
PWB ASSY USB-H
3
JP40081
PWB ASSY USB
4
JP40181
PWB ASSY DRF-H
4
JP40091
PWB ASSY DRF
5
JP40191
PWB ASSY SHE-H
5
JP40101
PWB ASSY SHE
6
JP40211
PWB ASSY SAF-H
6
JP40121
PWB ASSY SAF
7
JP40221
PWB ASSY SEN-H
9
9
9
9
10
JP40043
JP40044
JP40023
JP40024
JP39982
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
10
JP39981
PWB ASSY AEL
11
12
13
UA12512
JP40411
JP40481
DVD DRIVE ASSY(PC3RB)
PWB ASSY LCD
PWB ASSY MR
101
102
103
106
106
106
MC10581
MC10505
MC10591
EZ10846
EZ10843
QD28326
HEAT SINK
HEAT SINK
HEAT SINK
TERMINAL,SHOE
TERMINAL,SHOE
SHOE,COLD
107
108
NJ13053
QD28995
HOLDER,USB
CASE,FRONT
ASSY
ASSY
ASSY
ASSY
ASSY
MAN-H
MAN-H
MAN
MAN
AEL-H
Remarks
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70EG/EB
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50EG/EB
VDR-M50GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70EG/EB
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
161
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Ref.
No.
108
Part No.
Part Name & Description
QD28991
CASE,FRONT
109
110
111
QX16741
GH10421
QX17202
COVER,MIC
MICROPHONE
COVER,LENS
111
QX17201
COVER,LENS
112
QX17231
HOOD ASSY
112
QX17241
HOOD ASSY
113
114
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
QX17211
QX17192
NA33681
NX25351
KX34312
QD28255
KX34141
MC10584
QD29472
QD28983
EZ10702
HP13758
COVER,JACK
COVER,ADJUSTMENT
FRAME,MECHA
LOCK UNIT
LOADER ASSY
CASE,SIDE(R)
BRACKET,LINK
HEAT SINK
COVER,DISC
COVER,REAR
TERMINAL,BATTERY
LCD UNIT
125
HP13753
LCD UNIT
126
127
QD29034
QD29214
CASE,SIDE(L)
COVER(L)
127
QD29212
COVER(L)
128
132
NA33711
NX24862
BRACKET(L)
FULCRUM ASSY
132
133
135
NX24861
QD28143
QD28674
FULCRUM ASSY
CASE,LCD(B)
CASE,LCD(U)
135
QD28673
CASE,LCD(U)
139
140
MN19701
NX25032
SHEET,LCD(MR)
FRAME,LENS
140
NX25621
FRAME,LENS
141
NX25882
COVER,FULCRUM(U)
141
NX25881
COVER,FULCRUM(U)
142
PH24892
COVER,FULCLUM(B)
142
143
144
145
149
PH24491
PV10431
MN20141
NX25711
NA34491
COVER,FULCLUM(B)
STRAP,HAND
SHEET,LCD
SCREW,FILTER
PLATE,USB
B101
B102
B103
B104
B105
B106
B107
B108
B109
B110
B111
B112
B113
B114
MK13283
MK13283
MK13283
MK11992
MK11992
MK13491
MJ10281
MJ10281
MJ10281
MJ10281
MJ10281
MJ10281
MJ10281
MK11992
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
Remarks
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70EG/EB
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70EG/EB
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
B115
B116
B117
B118
B119
B120
B121
B122
B123
B124
B125
B126
B127
B128
B129
B130
B131
B132
B133
B134
B135
B136
B137
B138
B139
B140
B141
B142
B143
B144
B145
B146
B147
B148
B149
B150
B151
B152
B153
B154
B155
B156
B157
B158
B159
B160
B161
B162
B163
MK11992
MK13491
MK13491
MJ10281
MJ10281
7773852
MK13282
MK13282
MK13282
MK13282
MK13283
MK13283
7773852
MK13283
MK13282
MK13282
MJ10281
MK13283
MK13282
MK13283
MK13121
MK13283
MK13281
MK13282
MK13282
MK13283
MK13283
MK13282
MK13282
MK13282
MK12821
MK12821
MK13251
MK13251
MK13251
MK12071
MK13281
MK13282
MK12071
MK12071
MK12071
MK13281
MK13281
MK13285
MK13285
MK13285
MK13286
MK13286
MJ10281
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
B164
MJ10281
SCREW
B165
MJ10281
SCREW
B166
MK11911
SCREW
B167
MK11911
SCREW
B168
MJ10281
SCREW
B169
MJ10281
SCREW
B170
MJ10281
SCREW
B171
MJ10281
SCREW
9.1.2.
Ref.
No.
601
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Remarks
KQ11162
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
Part Name & Description
LENS ASSY
Part No.
HP13632
LENS ASSY
602
UE16642
SENSOR ASSY
603
MN19651
CUSHION
604
DT10561
CRYSTAL
9.1.3.
CAMERA LENS SECTION PARTS
LIST
Part No.
Ref.
No.
601
Remarks
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
162
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Part Name & Description
Remarks
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
EVF SECTION PARTS LIST
Ref.
No.
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
Part No.
Part Name & Description
VEP28299D
VWJ1624
VGQ7102
VGL1028
VGL1029
VGL1030
VGQ7099
VGQ7098
L5BDDXH00014
VGQ7095
VGQ7094
VGL1031
413
414
415
416
418
419
420
422
423
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
433
VGQ7360
VGQ7160
VMP7606
VMC1833
VGQ7358
VGQ7097
VGQ7159
VMP8034
VGQ7249
VGQ8013
VDL1388
VGQ7103
VDG1601
VGQ5726
VGQ7096
VGU9160
VMG1625
EVF C.B.A
EVF FLEX
BL PIECE
EVF DIFFUSION SHEET
EVF PRISM SHEET
BL POLARIZED LIGHT PLATE
LCD PRESS PIECE
EVF BOTH SIDES TAPE
EVF PANEL
EVF MASK
LCD HOLD PIECE
LENS POLARIZED LIGHT
PLATE
EVF SHADING SHEET
POLARIZED LIGHT PLATE
EVF PLATE
EVF CLICK SPRING
EVF BARRIER
SLIDE CASE HOLDER
SLIDE PEACE
EVF FRAME
SLIDE SPACER
EVF REINFORCEMENT PEACE
EVF LENS
LENS HOLDER
GEAR OF VISIBILITY
EVF VISIBILITY WASHER
SLIDE CASE
KNOB OF VISIBILITY
EYE CAP
B401
B402
B403
B404
B405
B406
B407
B408
VHD1393
VHD1393
VHD1532
VHD1606
VHD1606
VHD1542
VHD1572
VHD1572
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
Remarks
(RTL)
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
9.1.4.
Ref.
No.
801
PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES
SECTION PARTS LIST
Part No.
VSK0631
Part Name & Description
9.2.
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT
PARTS LIST
Remarks
ADPTOR,AC
801
VSK0631-A
ADPTOR,AC
802
EV10951
CORD,AC
802
EV10931
CORD,POWER
803
804
805
806
809
EW12522
EV11012
VEQ3993
EW12531
VQT0K94
809
VQT0K93
CORD,AVS
CORD,DC
REMOTE HAND SET
CORD,USB
OPERATING GUIDE
(FRENCH/GERMAN)
OPERATING GUIDE (UK)
809
VQT0K98
OPERATING GUIDE
VDR-M70EG/EB
VDR-M50EG/EB
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50GC
VDR-M70EG/GC
VDR-M50EG/GC
VDR-M70EB
VDR-M50EB
Ref.
No.
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M70EB
VDR-M50EB
VDR-M70EG/GC
VDR-M50EG/GC
811
828
829
QX16992
VFF0249
VQT0K95
830
VQT0K96
831
VQT0K97
833
EV11121
CAP,LENS
CD-ROM
OPERATING GUIDE
(ITALY/DUTCH)
OPERATING GUIDE
(PORTUGUESE/SPANISH)
OPERATING GUIDE
(SWEDISH/DANISH)
CORD,AC INLET (C)
834
EV11161
CORD,AC INLET (AU)
838
851
852
852
852
852
852
852
853
TS16755
SP18301
SG27481
SG27463
SG27465
SG27482
SG27464
SG27466
SU14111
SHOULDER BELT
CUSHION
CARTON BOX
CARTON BOX
CARTON BOX
BOX,CARTON
BOX,CARTON
BOX,CARTON
SOFT BAG
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50GC
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50GC
VDR-M70EG
VDR-M70EB
VDR-M70GC
VDR-M50EG
VDR-M50EB
VDR-M50GC
163
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Remarks
n
JP40151
PWB ASSY FRT-H
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40061
PWB ASSY FRT
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40161
PWB ASSY GYR-H
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40071
PWB ASSY GYR
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40171
PWB ASSY USB-H
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40081
PWB ASSY USB
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40181
PWB ASSY DRF-H
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40091
PWB ASSY DRF
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40191
PWB ASSY SHE-H
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40101
PWB ASSY SHE
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40221
PWB ASSY SEN-H
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP39982
PWB ASSY AEL-H
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP39981
PWB ASSY AEL
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40411
PWB ASSY LCD
(RTL)
n
JP40481
PWB ASSY MR
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
n
JP40151
PWB ASSY FRT-H
n
JP40061
PWB ASSY FRT
C1801
C1802
C1803
C1804
AA00968R
AA00966R
AA01126R
AA01126R
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 0.22U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 0.22U
D1802
MA132WA
DIODE
Remarks
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
MA3S132D
IC1801 CE10291R
SENSOR,REMOTE(RS-771)
LD1801 CC12281R
DIODE
PD1801 PD410TN
PHOTOB DIODE
PG1801 EA14631R
PG1802 EA13571R
PLUG
PLUG
Q1801
Q1802
Q1803
DTC114YE
B1ABDF000001
2SD2345-S
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
Q1803
2SD2345JSL
TRANSISTOR
R1801
R1803
R1805
R1806
R1807
R1811
R1813
R1814
0790033
0104084
0790071
0790046
0790041
AQ10344R
0790033
0790019
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
B1ABDF000001
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
2SD23450S
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
470
2.2M
330K
4.7K
1.8K
10M
470
47
n
JP40161
PWB ASSY GYR-H
n
JP40071
PWB ASSY GYR
C1401
C1402
C1403
C1404
C1405
C1406
C1407
C1408
C1409
C1410
C1411
C1412
C1413
AA00966R
AA00966R
0893179
0893179
0893182
0893182
0893182
0893182
AA00966R
AA00966R
0893213
0893213
AA01101R
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P
C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
IC1401 L2ES00000010
IC1402 L2ES00000011
IC1403 C0ABHA000049
IC
IC
IC
Q1401
XP4501
TRANSISTOR-TRANSISTOR
R1401
R1402
R1403
R1404
R1405
0790045
0790045
0790044
0790044
0790024
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
XP04501
3.9K
3.9K
3.3K
3.3K
100
164
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Ref.
No.
R1406
R1407
R1408
R1409
R1410
R1411
R1412
R1413
R1414
R1415
Part No.
Part Name & Description
0790024
AQ00269R
AQ00269R
AQ00228R
AQ00228R
0790072
0790072
0790037
0790037
0790051
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
n
JP40171
PWB ASSY USB-H
n
JP40081
PWB ASSY USB
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
100
680K
680K
20K
20K
390K
390K
1.0K
1.0K
10K
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
BL8101 BE10134R
COIL 180UH
JK8101 EY11381R
JACK,USB
R8101
0790055
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 22K
n
JP40181
PWB ASSY DRF-H
n
JP40091
PWB ASSY DRF
PG2301 EA13711R
PG2302 EA13711R
PLUG
PLUG
n
JP40191
PWB ASSY SHE-H
n
JP40101
PWB ASSY SHE
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
BA1801 FS10961
BATTERY
C0153
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U
0893222
PG0151 EA13713R
PG0153 EA13589R
PG0154 EA13581R
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
n
JP40221
PWB ASSY SEN-H
C1001
C1002
C1003
C1004
C1005
C1006
C1007
C1008
0893107
0893062
0893239
AA00699R
0893239
AD10484R
0893235
0893239
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 5P
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 16V 10U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U
Q1001
Q1002
Q1003
2SC393000L
2SC393000L
UN9212
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR-RESISTOR
R1001
R1002
R1003
R1005
R1006
R1007
0790044
0790024
0790015
0790041
0790052
0790051
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
Remarks
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
UNR9212
3.3K
100
22
1.8K
12K
10K
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
n
JP39982
PWB ASSY AEL-H
n
JP39981
PWB ASSY AEL
BL6201 BE10391R
BL6202 BE10391R
COIL
COIL
C1302
C1303
C1309
C1310
C1311
C1312
C1314
C1315
C1316
0893311
AA01111R
0893315
0893333
0893328
AA01111R
0893276
AA01111R
0893316
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 220P
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 470P
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 25V 4700P
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 50V 560P
C1316
AA10873R
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.068U
C1318
C1319
C1320
C1321
C1322
C1323
C1324
AA00951R
AD10484R
0893333
AA01101R
0893133
0893133
0893333
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 330P
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 330P
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C1324
AA10885R
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U
C1325
C1331
C1332
C1333
0893333
AA01111R
AA10872R
AA01113R
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U
C1334
C1350
C1351
C3701
C3702
C3703
C3705
C3706
C3707
C3708
C3709
C3710
C3711
C3712
C3713
C3715
C3716
C3717
C3718
C3720
C6101
C6102
C6103
C6104
C6105
C6106
C6107
C6108
C6109
C6110
C6111
C6112
C6113
C6114
C6115
C6116
AD10485R
0893333
AA10872R
AA00968R
AA00968R
AA00422R
0893191
AA01121R
AA01121R
AA01121R
AA01121R
0893193
AA10382R
AA10382R
0893184
AA01111R
AA01111R
AA01111R
AA00951R
AA01111R
AA10872R
0893354
0893358
0893278
AA01132R
0893354
AA10872R
0893278
0893358
AA01132R
0893331
0893331
AA00968R
AA10885R
0893333
AA10885R
CAPACITOR CH 10V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 10U
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P
C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.022U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.033U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 150P
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U
CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 150P
CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.033U
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U
CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P
CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U
Remarks
(RTL)
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
(RTL)
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
165
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Ref.
No.
C6117
C6118
C6131
C6201
C6202
C6203
C6204
C6205
C6206
C6207
C6208
C6301
C6302
C6303
C6304
C6305
C6306
C6307
C6308
C6309
C6310
C6311
C6312
C6313
C6314
C6315
C6316
C6317
C6318
C6319
C6320
C6321
C6322
C6323
C6324
C6327
C6328
C6329
C6330
C6331
C6332
C6333
C6334
C6336
C7001
C7002
C7004
C7013
C7014
C7021
Part No.
Part Name & Description
0893333
AA00968R
AA00968R
AA10382R
AA10382R
AA01132R
AA01132R
AA10382R
AA10382R
AA01113R
AA00968R
AA00966R
AA01113R
AA01113R
AA10872R
AA00968R
AA01101R
AA01101R
AA01101R
AA10872R
0893333
AD10484R
AA00968R
AA10382R
AA10382R
AA00966R
0893333
0893333
AD10278R
AA00964R
AA00968R
AA00968R
AA00964R
AD10891R
0893333
AA10872R
0893333
AA00966R
AD10483R
AA10872R
0893333
0893333
AA10872R
0893333
0893333
AA10872R
0893347
AD10266R
AD10266R
0893333
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 4V 100U
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 2.2U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 2.2U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 100U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 33U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
E.CAPACITOR CH 4V 22U
E.CAPACITOR CH 4V 22U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U
C7022
C7023
C7024
AA10382R
AA10382R
0893179
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
D6301
IC1301
IC1302
IC1303
IC1304
IC3701
IC6101
IC6103
IC6201
IC7001
IC7002
MA132K
CK46701U
C0ABBA000145
CK40231R
CK43972R
CK45761U
NJM2112V
AN2903FJQ
C0FBZJ000005
MB88347PFV
CK43971R
DIODE
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
L3701
L3702
L3703
L6103
L6301
L6302
BA10143R
BA10143R
BA10143R
0773006
BA10584R
BA10577R
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
10UH
10UH
10UH
330UH
10UH
10UH
Remarks
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
MA3S132K
C0ABCB000027
C0FBZJ000005
C0FBBD000099
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
L6303
L6304
L6305
L6306
Part No.
Part Name & Description
BA10577R
BA10577R
BA10582R
BA10577R
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
PG1301 EA11694R
PLUG
PG1302 EA13589R
PLUG
PG7001
PG7002
PG7003
PG7004
PG7008
PG7009
EA13681R
EA13851R
EA14621R
EA13571R
EA14511R
EA13703R
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
Q1301
Q1302
Q1303
Q1304
Q3701
Q3702
Q6101
Q6102
Q6103
Q6104
Q6105
Q6108
Q6109
Q6207
Q6208
Q7001
CA12502R
2SB1424
CA12891R
2SC4617
CA12911R
CA12891R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12781R
CA12781R
CA11341R
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
Q7002
CA12891R
TRANSISTOR
Q7009
UMH9NTN
TRANSISTOR
R1303
0790234
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100K
R1303
0790237
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 180K
R1308
R1310
R1312
R1314
R1315
R1317
R1318
0790195
0790235
0790216
0790216
0790216
0790247
0790221
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
R1318
0790219
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 8.2K
R1319
R1320
R1321
R1322
R1323
R1324
R1325
R1326
R1327
R1328
R1329
0790234
0790234
0790234
0790234
AQ00811R
AQ00846R
AQ00842R
AQ00842R
AQ00828R
0790195
0790229
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
R1329
0790226
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K
R1330
0790229
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 47K
R1330
0790226
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K
R1332
0790226
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K
R1332
0790228
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 39K
R1333
R1334
0790209
0790221
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K
Remarks
10UH
10UH
47UH
10UH
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
120
120K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
1.0M
10K
100K
100K
100K
100K
12K
270K
180K
180K
56K
120
47K
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
166
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
Ref.
No.
R1336
Part No.
Part Name & Description
0790221
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K
R1337
R1347
R1348
0790221
0790209
0790217
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 5.6K
R1349
R1350
0790234
0790197
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100K
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 180
R1355
0790194
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100
R1355
0790195
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 120
R1364
0790212
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 2.2K
R1370
R3701
R3703
R3704
R6101
R6102
R6103
R6104
R6105
R6106
R6107
R6108
R6109
R6110
R6111
R6112
R6113
R6114
R6115
R6116
R6117
R6118
R6119
R6120
R6121
R6122
R6123
R6124
R6125
R6126
R6127
R6128
R6129
R6130
R6131
R6132
R6133
R6148
R6157
R6201
R6202
R6205
R6206
R6207
R6208
R6209
R6301
R6302
R6304
R6306
R6307
R6308
R6309
R6310
R6311
R6312
R6313
R6314
R6316
0790216
0790221
0790225
0790216
AQ10747R
AQ10747R
0790227
0790225
0790236
0790228
0790236
0790221
0790221
0790236
0790228
0790225
0790236
0790221
0790221
0790227
0790225
AQ10713R
AQ10713R
0790227
0790217
0790223
0790207
AQ10713R
AQ10761R
0790215
0790217
0790223
0790207
AQ10713R
AQ10761R
0790215
0790216
AQ10712R
AQ10712R
0790207
0790207
0790223
0790223
0790227
0790227
0790181
0790207
0790207
0790216
0790238
0790238
0790216
0790215
0790221
0790229
0790217
0790229
0790211
0790242
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
4.7K
10K
22K
4.7K
3.9K
3.9K
33K
22K
150K
39K
150K
10K
10K
150K
39K
22K
150K
10K
10K
33K
22K
100K
100K
33K
5.6K
15K
1.0K
100K
47K
3.9K
5.6K
15K
1.0K
100K
47K
3.9K
4.7K
10K
10K
1.0K
1.0K
15K
15K
33K
33K
10
1.0K
1.0K
4.7K
220K
220K
4.7K
3.9K
10K
47K
5.6K
47K
1.8K
390K
Remarks
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M50
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
R6317
R6318
R6319
R6324
R6325
R6326
R6327
R6328
R6330
R6450
R6451
R7009
R7010
R7011
R7012
R7013
R7014
R7016
R7018
R7021
R7022
R7023
R7024
R7026
R7031
R7038
R7049
R7050
R7051
R7052
R7053
R7054
R7055
R7056
R7057
R7058
R7060
Part No.
Part Name & Description
0790202
0790202
0790211
0790229
0790216
0790181
0790209
0790181
0790221
0790214
0790214
0790181
0790181
0790181
0790181
0790181
BM10696R
0790181
BM10349R
0790201
0790201
0790201
0790024
0790194
0790207
0790207
0790207
0790207
0790181
0790181
BM10349R
BM10696R
BM10696R
BM10696R
BM10696R
0790181
0790068
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
COIL
RESISTOR
COIL
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
R7061
0790073
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 470K
R7065
BM10345R
COIL
R7089
R7090
BM10696R
BM10696R
COIL
COIL
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
Remarks
390
390
1.8K
47K
4.7K
10
1.5K
10
10K
3.3K
3.3K
10
10
10
10
10
Ref.
No.
C3443
Part No.
Part Name & Description
0893126
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P
D3401
D3451
MAZ80560ML
MA3S13300L
ZENNER DIODE
DIODE
IC3401 CK46211R
IC
L3401
L3402
L3403
BA10577R
BA10577R
BA10577R
COIL 10UH
COIL 10UH
COIL 10UH
LD3451
LD3452
LD3453
LD3454
LD3455
LD3456
B3AFB0000061
B3AFB0000061
B3AFB0000061
B3AFB0000061
B3AFB0000061
B3AFB0000061
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
CHIP 1/16W 10
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
330
330
330
100
100
1.0K
1.0K
1.0K
1.0K
10
10
CHIP 1/16W 10
CHIP 1/16W 220K
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
SW7001 FB10471R
SWITCH,TACT
ZD7002 CC10574R
DIODE
VDR-M70
EG/EB/GC
n
JP40411
PWB ASSY LCD
(RTL)
C3401
C3402
C3403
C3404
C3405
C3406
C3407
C3408
C3409
C3410
C3412
C3413
C3414
C3415
C3417
C3418
C3419
C3420
C3421
C3441
0893193
0893193
0893193
AA00968R
0893219
AA00935R
0893179
0893179
0893179
0893179
0893179
AA00966R
AA00933R
0893179
0893193
AA01111R
AA00968R
0893179
0893179
0893126
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V0.0068U
C.CAPACITOR 10V 3.3U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U
C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 1.5U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U
CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U
C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P
167
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
PG3401 EA11695R
PG3402 EA13182R
PG3403 EA10362R
PLUG
PLUG
CONNECTOR
Q3451
Q3452
Q3453
Q3454
Q3455
Q3456
Q3457
Q3458
2SB1424
CA12891R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
CA12502R
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
R3401
R3402
R3403
R3404
R3405
R3406
R3408
R3411
R3412
R3413
R3414
R3418
R3419
R3420
R3422
R3451
R3452
R3453
R3454
R3455
R3456
R3457
R3458
R3459
0790037
AQ00237R
AQ00237R
0790051
0790064
0790064
0790037
0790037
0790037
0790037
0790037
0790011
0790011
0790011
0790077
0790059
0790037
0790044
0790017
0790017
0790017
0790017
0790017
0790017
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
n
JP40481
PWB ASSY MR
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1.0K
43K
43K
10K
100K
100K
1.0K
1.0K
1.0K
1.0K
1.0K
10
10
10
1M
47K
1.0K
3.3K
33
33
33
33
33
33
IC3501 DN8797MS
IC3502 CK29741R
HOLE IC
IC
n
SWL2
PG8011 EA10504R
PG8012 EA13581R
PLUG
PLUG
R8011
R8012
R8013
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 220
RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 2.2K
AQ00198R
AQ00176R
AQ00203R
Remarks
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
Ref.
No.
R8014
R8015
R8016
R8017
R8018
R8019
R8020
R8021
R8022
R8023
R8024
R8031
R8033
R8034
R8035
R8036
R8037
R8038
R8039
R8040
Part No.
Part Name & Description
AQ00183R
AQ00207R
AQ00209R
AQ00187R
AQ00214R
AQ00192R
AQ00221R
AQ00227R
AQ00201R
AQ00236R
AQ00214R
AQ00194R
AQ00192R
AQ00194R
AQ00194R
AQ00167R
AQ00194R
AQ00181R
AQ00198R
AQ00172R
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
SW8011
SW8012
SW8013
SW8014
SW8015
SW8016
FB10591R
FB10471R
FB10471R
FB10471R
FB10471R
FB10471R
SWITCH
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
560
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
150
Remarks
390
3.3K
3.9K
5.6K
820
10K
18K
1.8K
39K
5.6K
1.0K
820
1.0K
1.0K
100
1.0K
330
1.5K
168
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals
VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC
10 FACTORY SETTING
Set the factory setting to “Default at factory” in Table 4-2-1 of 4.2.1. “List of setting items to be reset”.
169
Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals